Home

HP Safety Gate 08565-90014 User's Manual

1. TOP VIEW A24 A24 STEP GAIN OPTION 100 AMPLIFIER OSCILLATOR F 100 Hz BW A25 UP DOWN CONVERTER A26 3 MHz FILTER 25 OPTION 100 25624 25 20 LO NULL A25TP1 DC GAIN gf EN P mis wan A26 OPTION 100 A26C20 A26TP9 A26TP7 A26TP5 A26TP3 A26C13 CTR 26 32 A26C12 SYM 5 SYM A26R53 fret S Bn A26C2 100 Hz GAIN go FL ie He S SYM 26 33 ge N A26C3 CTR mj CTR Figure 5 63 Option 100 Bandwidth Filter Adjustment Locations 5 101 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 33 OPTION 100 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord remove 8565A top cover and install A25 Up Down Converter on an extender board b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 62 and set 8565A controls as follows FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN CC git iore cp d 0 dB REF LEY Bich Laud whcee e ander a dU hou kn an E e A RR 10 dBm REF LEVEL FINE eet cd aee E doe A ad uad ane E 0 RESOLUTION BW oeste mm mme morem mme Idem E Re rsen 1 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIY sceri EY NE EXEC dS 1 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN MODE 4 wea hit dre a e yr ho CR LIN TUNING cv eR E Liga ota ce a
2. 100 kHz Modulation eve ceo um EN RAO I eee ee EE FM Peak Deviation eter ese e ete XI od HR Naa 300 kHz vua Rey x UR ERE ER UR MEER E EE HE we Pies OFF Connect digital voltmeter across Al4TP1 TICK S T high DVM input and Astea V7 low DVM input See Figure 5 43 Adjust FINE TUNING control for a digital voltmeter reading of 0 volts 0 01 volts Connect digital voltmeter high input to AI4TP3 VCXO SWP and adjust 14 68 FET OFF for 0 00 volts 0 01 volts Set FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to PER DIV and connect signal generator output to spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Center 50 MHz carrier frequency on spectrum analyzer CRT display set 8640B FM switch to INT and adjust signal generator peak deviation for uniform amplitude of 100 kHz modulation peaks Figure 5 44 Adjust AI4R57 TICK SWP for one division spacing between modulation peaks use FINE TUNING control to align peaks on graticule line Set FINE TUNING control to midrange and activate tuning stabilizer AUTO STABILIZER push button out A Model 8565A Adjustments o ADJUSTMENTS 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS Cont d k Adjust AI4R71 VCXO SWP for one division spacing between modulation peaks use FINE TUNING control to align peaks on graticule line NOTE In the following step adjust signal generator carrier frequency 50 MHz to set modulation peaks on graticule lines l Set FREQ SP
3. HP 355C H80 5 32 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 18 LOG AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT Cont d TOP VIEW A21TP5 21 22 2451 VIDEO VIDEO LOG AMPLIFIER TEST NORM A22 A22R1 A22R2 A22R3 LOG GAIN LOG LIN LIN GAIN Figure 5 17 Log Amplifier Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord remove 8565A top cover and set 2451 TEST NORM switch to TEST position b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 16 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz htt nnn 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN see Ee RESI Roh Re maed d rp ORI Walk 0 dB REF LEVEL evi eX rk d wA e RES EON V X R 50 dBm REFLEVELPFINE 4 ge cdo ESAE ES Oe hehe OSSA Vau ace 0 RESOLUTION BW tease Rx ra e Ren 1 eR 300 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV cece cece cee c cree hn nn 10 MHz AMPLITUDE SCALE 5 ehh ettet LIN TUNING 4 229 x Rey ma e sane a 0 100 GHz 5 33 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 9 18 LOG AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT Cont d 5 34 Set REF LEVEL to 50 dBm Set 10 dB step attenuator to 0 dB and 1 dB step attenuator to 0 dB Adjust TUNING control to center 100 MHz signal on CRT display Select ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY SPAN MODE and set VIDEO FILTER to NOISE AVG Peak signal with FINE TUNING control Adjust front pane
4. 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN uu accion ove Rd Rn Syn okt a Roa PC TNR ree actor 10 dB REP LEVEL 4 72 he DEER acd es e ww ee RA dl n Aa 0 dBm RESOLUTION BW carita eate PEE DESC M NOD 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 5 ete nux oq acr on RUE a a See 10 MHz AMPLITUDE SCALE Mada eee Heke LIN ere BG eae 0 050 GHz CONVentional uy v E RESET e e RI e Sea ER es Depressed c Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to front panel INPUT 500 connector see Figure 5 6 d Adjust front panel VERT POSN to position CRT trace baseline one division above bottom horizontal e graticule line 5 22 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 14 ORTHOGONALITY TRACE ALIGNMENT AND PATTERN ADJUSTMENT Cont d e Adjust front panel TUNING control to position 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT display on right edge of graticule display Adjust REF LEVEL FINE to position peak of 100 MHz signal at REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line f Adjust front panel TRACE ALIGN to align 100 MHz signal parallel with right edge of graticule display g Adjust R71 ORTHOG Figure 5 7 to align baseline parallel with the horizontal graticule line h Adjust R59 PAT to remove any curvature in the baseline or 100 MHz signal traces i Repeat steps f through h until no further adjustment is necessary j Adjust front panel VERT POSN to position baseline on bottom horizontal graticule line k Adjustment complete Set LINE
5. HP 1250 0077 PROCEDURE a Zero and calibrate the power meter Connect thermistor mount through adapter directly to CAL OUTPUT port and measure power level Calibrator output level should be 10 dBm 0 3 dB b Disconnect thermistor mount adapter and connect CAL OUTPUT to counter input of HP 8640B Set counter mode to expand X10 and external Calibrator output frequency should be 100 MHz 10 kHz e S 4 38 Model 8565A Performance Tests e PERFORMANCE TESTS 2 en ee eru E 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST SPECIFICATION Frequency Response with 0 or 10 dB of Input Attenuation Frequency response includes input at tenuator preselector and mixer response plus mixing mode gain variation band to band DESCRIPTION Frequency response is checked in each internal mixing band The spectrum analyzer is internally swept in FULL BAND mode and the RF input signal is very slowly swept across the entire FREQUENCY BAND selected The resulting display is a picket fence which varies in heighth across the CRT Since the RF source is leveled and held quite flat across each frequency band variations in amplitude on the display represent the frequency response of the spectrum analyzer The 10 5 to 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND re quires two different test setups but is performed in the same manner Since leveling within reasonable limits becomes difficult from 18 GHz to 22 GHz the RF output at the power splitter is charact
6. DISPLAY BLANKING EM NORM PL uale xa doc eet te rir ure daa due e bee PL Set 2851 NORM OFF TEST switch to OFF Set synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to d Phase lock sweep oscillator as follows 5 78 1 2 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator start marker to low frequency of selected spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND and adjust start marker for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control fully clockwise and stop marker to high frequency of selected spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND Adjust stop marker for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phase locked spectrum analyzer CRT display Figure 5 48 If the system is breaking phase lock repeat steps d 1 through d 3 o Model 8565A Adjustments e ADJUSTMENTS 5 29 PRELIMINARY BIAS ADJUSTMENT Cont d REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 106 SCALE 4 dm 1 0 dBRHEN 5 dj Figure 5 48 Phase Locked Spectrum Analyzer CRT Display e Adjust A20R3 V4 Figure 5 49 over full range and note position for minimum ripple on CRT trace Set A20R3 V4 for minimum ripple TOP VIEW A20 A20R1 A20R3 A20R2 A20R6 A20R5 v3 V4 V5 V6 R5 A20 BIAS ASSEMBLY a d Y e Figure 5 49 Preliminary Bias Adjustment Locations 5 79 Adjustments Model 8565A
7. Frequency Figure 8 Locating a signal 4 Chapter 2 TUNING The TUNING control adjusts the center frequency of the analyzer In the full band modes the TUNING control is used to locate a marker under a particular signal The FRE QUENCY readout indicates the center frequency of the analyzer or the frequency at the tuning marker By pulling out the outer control knob rapid tuning is enabled Rapid tuning is especially useful when moving the tuning marker in the full band modes Normal tuning resumes when the knob is pushed in When the analyzer is stabilized frequency span lt 100 kHz Div only FINE TUNING should be used to tune the analyzer If coarse tuning is desired the AUTO STABILIZER can be disabled with the pushbutton switch FREQUENCY SPAN MODES r zri quency span ong Four pushbutton span modes are AN DIY BANI T kk one available on the HP 8565A ZERO YE SPAN PER DIV FULL BAND n and 1 7 22 GHz SPAN Also an additional F full band setting is available on the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control knob The full band modes FULL BAND and 1 7 22 GHz SPAN enable the analyzer to monitor the various fre quency bands as well as a multi octave coverage from 1 7 to 22 GHz PER DIV is generally used for detailed signal analysis and ZERO SPAN is used for time domain analysis The following text explains the various FREQUENCY SPAN MODE settings in more detail Zero Span ZERO
8. RAUS eR Ee Eu p e S Rem 20 dB REP LEVEL EE eiua aes ege boar eh Rees ee Reh odis 10 dBm REF LEVEL EQ Em ades 0 RESOLUTION BW 52e ek ati tees RE ees 1 kHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN MODE ZERO SPAN AMPLITUDE SCALE snid 1v toe rea ed 10 dB LOG DIV VIDEO FILTER i eae ah An Fett bt ax and Se s 03 b Connect equipment as shown in Figure 4 6 Tune signal generator to 321 4 MHz and set output level to approximately 10 dBm Connect signal generator output to spectrum analyzer EXT MIXER BNC connector c Tune signal generator FINE TUNE control to peak signal on CRT Adjust output level to position trace at top graticule line 4 15 Performance Tests Model 8565A 4 11 4 16 PERFORMANCE TESTS RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH SELECTIVITY TEST Cont d Tune signal generator frequency FINE TUNE until trace drops to two divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on frequency counter MHz Tune signal generator frequency in opposite direction of step d until trace peaks and then drops to two divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on frequency counter K The difference between results of steps d and is the measu vd bandwidth at 60 dB points NOTE If 8565A has Option 100 installed perform all of the following steps If Option 100 is not installed proceed to step j Record measured bandwidth
9. ehe hh nnn 2 dB LOG DIV Frequency Response 01 to 18 GHz Bands b Using 01 to 2 4 GHz source connect equipment as shown in Configuration A of Figure 4 16 Con nect output of power splitter through 10 dB attenuator and adapter to thermistor mount With RF power off zero the power meter Turn RF power on Set sweep oscillator for 100 MHz and adjust RF power level for a power meter indiction of 8 dBm Connect output of power splitter through 10 dB attenuator and adapter directly do not use cable to INPUT 500 of spectrum analyzer Peak of signal should be at center horizontal graticule line one minor division 0 3 dB If not recheck sweep oscillator output level making sure that power meter has been properly calibrated and zeroed before making the measurement d Adjust REF LEVEL CAL to place peak of 100 MHz signal at center horizontal graticule line e Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to FULL BAND and set TUNING control fully counterclockwise lowest frequency Set BASELINE CLIPPER to 12 o clock position Set sweep oscillator to cover entire FREQUENCY BAND selected NOTE To properly set band edges using HP 8620C use marker sweep and set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode Set manual sweep control fully counterclockwise and adjust start marker control until signal is at left hand edge of spectrum analyzer display Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control fully clockwise and adjust stop marker unt
10. SWEEP FREQUENCY 100 Mhz fREQ SPAN OIV 1F To RF Input HP 8565A RF LO IF Figure 24 Mixer measurement Oscillators Distortion in oscillators may be harmonically or non harmonically related to the fundamental frequency Non harmonie oscillator outputs are usually termed spurious Both harmonie and spurious outputs of an oscillator can be minimized with proper biasing and filtering techniques The HP 8565A can monitor changes in distortion levels while modifications to the oscillator are made In the full band modes a tuning marker can be located under any signal response to determine its frequency and hence its relationship to the oscillator s fundamental frequency Fig ure 25 is a CRT photo of the fundamental and second harmonic of an S Band 2 to 4 GHz YIG oscillator The REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE dm 1 0 dBRHEN 10 dB A B amp H 6H SWEEP TIME FREQUENCY Figure 25 Oscillator fundamental and second harmonic internal preselector of the HP 8565A enables the analyzer to measure a low level harmonic in the presence of a high level fundamental The photo was obtained by adjusting the PERSIST control to allow storage of the trace and then tuning the oscillator over a narrow band Note Consult AN 150 11 for more information on dis tortion measurements MODULATION AM The wide dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer allows accurate mea
11. 4 15 AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST Cont d Table 4 5 Average Noise Level Average Noise Level First Harmonic Maximum IF MHz Mong Standard Opt 200 dBm dBu V FREQUENCY BAND GH2 RES REF LEVEL PUT ATTEN LOG SCALE qh Re 720 Q 98 10 5 22 GHz 12 dBm 35 dBuV 8 5 18 GHz 83 dBm 24 dBuV 5 8 12 9 GHz 92 dBm 15 dBuV 102 dBm 5 dBuV 106 dBm 1 dBuV 3 8 8 5 GHz inm 01 1 8 GHz 110 dBm 3 dBuV D LO FEEDTHROUGH FREQUENCY MARKER F H FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 4 11 Average Noise Level Sensitivity Internal Mixing Frequency Bands e Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise and press WRITE pushbutton Reduce INTENSITY Ya 4 27 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 16 REFERENCE LEVEL VARIATION TEST SPECIFICATION Reference level variation Input Attenuator at 0 dB 10 dB steps lt 0 5 dB 0 to 70 dBm lt 1 0dB 0 to 90 dBm Vernier 0 to 12 dB continuous Maximum error lt 0 5 dB when read from Reference Level Fine control DESCRIPTION The reference level variation is tested by checking the IF gain steps in dB per division log and in linear scale Specially calibrated step attenuators 355 C D Option H80 are used to check the 10 dB steps and the vernier REF LEVEL FINE control SIGNAL SPECTRUM ANALYZER GENERATOR L0
12. 5 98 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS mS 5 32 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE CALIBRATION Cont d PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 60 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz sees 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN ccc cece cece cece sn 10 dB REFELEVEEL 22 24 2420255 nia ala v reckon Bate A es 0dBm REFLEVELEFINE 2 kh ere Vara onm Sie ele RR elses dra 0 RESOLUTION 1 MHz FREQUENCY nnn nnn 10MHz AMPLITUDE SCALE cece eee hh hh ht 2 dB T NING e fstIRe 4G OR Rene re HEN Reet gem 0 100 GHz REP LEVEL CAE L6 Rte s Fully counterclockwise c Adjust TUNING control to center 100 MHz signal on CRT display d Adjust REF LEVEL CAL clockwise to increase 100 MHz signal amplitude by 3 dB 1 1 2 divisions e Note how many dB signal peak is away from third graticule line from the bottom of display f For every dB signal peak is away from this graticule line change value of factory selected resistor A28R2 Figure 5 61 by 10 An increase in resistance will increase signal level When signal is within 1 dB of graticule line proceed to step g g Adjust REF LEVEL CAL to position signal peak on third graticule line from bottom of display
13. Effective Signal Input The Effective Signal Input is simply the signal at the input minus the analyzer INPUT ATTEN setting In equa tion form The horizontal axis on the dynamic range chart represents the Effective Signal Input Dynamic range varies as a function of Effective Signal Input This is not as critical in the preselected 1 7 to 22 GHz frequency range However in the 0 01 to 1 8 GHz range the Effective Signal Input for optimum dynamic range should be approximately 40 dBm when measur ing second order distortion products Beyond this level second order distortion will increase 20 dB for every 10 dB increase in signal input For third order distortion measurements the Effective Signal Input should be ap ECIAL TOPICS proximately 30 dBm The optimum dynamic range in the 1 7 to 22 GHz band is achieved with an Effective Signal Input of approximately 0 dBm This applies for both second order and third order distortion products Example Refer to Figure 17 on page 11 It is desired to measure the third order distortion prod ucts from a device The input signals are at 1456 MHz and 1466 MHz Find the Effective Signal Input to obtain the optimum dynamic range Answer The Effective Signal Input to achieve this is 30 dBm for each signal Since this is a third order meas urement we use the dotted third order distortion curve applicable to the frequency range Intersect this curve with the sensitivity
14. Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 18 LOG AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d l Repeat steps i j and k until digital voltmeter indicates 800 mV plus offset 1 mV with no further adjustment of A22R2 in step k m Set 10 dB step attenuator to the positions shown in Table 5 6 and record DVM reading for each setting Correct the DVM readings by algebraically adding the offset recorded in step h If necessary readjust A22R2 to meet the limits in Table 5 6 Table 5 6 Log Fidelity Check STEP ATTENUATOR DVM READING DVM READING CORRECTED FOR OFFSET Min mV Max mV SETTING dB n Set 10 dB step attenuator to 0 dB and set front panel REF LEVEL CAL for a digital voltmeter reading of 800 mV plus offset recorded in steph 1 mV o Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN The digital voltmeter should indicate the reading set in step n 25 mV If it does go to step q If it does not or if Log fidelity is not within limits go to step p and selec A22RI6 E p Select A22R16 to obtain an output in step o within 25 mV of the reading set in step n Decreasing A22R16 10 percent will increase the DVM reading approximately 30 mV in step o 5 35 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 18 LOG AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT Cont d NOTE Log fidelity must be considered when selecting A22R16 That is if the DVM READING CORRECTED FOR OFFSET in Table 5 6 is greater than 100 mV for a STEP ATTENUATOR SETTING of 70 dB A22R16 should b
15. SWEEP TIME OIV Figure 31 Slope detection of FM signal Note Consult AN 150 1 for more information on AM FM Pulsed RF A pulsed RF signal is a train of RF pulses having con stant amplitude Some parameters to be determined in measuring pulsed RF signals are PRF pulse repetition frequency pulse width duty cycle peak and average pulse power and the on off ratio of the modulator Figure 32 illustrates a line spectrum presentation of a pulsed RF signal RES W REF LEVEL uiid 20 dm 1 0 ATEN LOG SCALE 10 d8 A 2 02 Ghz SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY 500 k Hf FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 32 Line spectrum A line spectrum as opposed to a pulsed spectrum is an actual Fourier representation of a pulsed RF signal all the spectral components of the signal are fully resolved To obtain a line spectrum on the analyzer the rule of thumb to follow is that the RESOLUTION BW be less than 0 3 x PRF This insures that individual spectral lines will be resolved From the line spectrum shown in Figure 32 it is possible to measure the following parameters PRF 50 kHz spacing between spectral lines lobe width 1 MHz mainlobe power 48 dBm Then from the above measurement the following data can be calculated 1 1 Pulse width Tobe width 1 MBz lus 50 kHz Duty it dd 1MHz 005 A factor to consider when measuring the amplitude of a pulsed RF
16. Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top and bottom covers Remove High Voltage Power Supply protective cover Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 3 Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green INPUT ATTEN bue eS ald euch ee eed os 0 dB REFERENCELEVEL 2 ERE 0 dBm AMPLITUDE SCALE iue e desse SG gees See gate LIN CONVentional se creci eee 210 54 9 e ee dor Ue eo rea ee Depressed PERSIS Eur Fully counterclockwise FOCUS teed eR ERI RR Rd RASEN MENGE Rare Midrange INTENSE Yes cath nere EMI eer ete LIPS P VE Dim CRT trace High Voltage Power Supply Calibrate High Voltage probe as follows 1 Measure output of 158V supply at A40A2TP10 and note reading 2 Connect 1000 1 divider probe to digital voltmeter and set voltmeter to 1V range 3 Measure 158V supply through 1000 1 divider probe and note reading dz Vde 4 Divide reading noted in step c 1 into reading noted in step c 3 This gives the calibration factor of the high voltage probe Set digital voltmeter to 10V range and measure output of high voltage CRT cathode power supply on board assembly A8 HVTP yellow wire Adjust A9R2 HV Figure 5 4 for a reading equal to the calibration factor calculated in step c 4 times 3000 volts Focus Centering f Depress bot
17. f Increase the attenuation of the step attenuator and record the DVM reading for each step up to 70 dB in Table 4 14 Table 4 14 Log Display Accuracy Difference Attenuator DVM Corrected Theoretical Theoretical Between Setting Reading DVM Reading Reading Subtracted Adjacent dB mV Reading mV from DVM Reading Readings mV mV mV 800 Ref DVM Reading minus offset recorded in step b Example 1 5mV offset Difference Attenuat DVM Corrected Theoretical ca Belin DVM Theoretical Reading Subtracted d dB mV Reading Reading From DVM Reading Adjacent mV mV mV Readings mV 4 49 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 22 DISPLAY ACCURACY TEST Cont d g Having recorded the DVM readings for all of the attenuator settings from 0 to 70 dB subtract the theoretical reading from the corrected DVM reading DVM reading minus offset in each case and record results in Table 4 14 h Subtract each converted reading theoretical reading subtracted from DVM reading from the previous converted reading This subtraction must be performed algebraically Record results in Table 4 14 see Example 1 i The difference between adjacent readings Table 4 14 should not exceed 10 mV 20 1 dB dB j Note the highest positive and negative value recorded under Theoretical Reading Subtracted from DVM Reading Add their absolute values disregar
18. h Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top cover 5 99 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 33 OPTION 100 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheets 37 38 and 39 DESCRIPTION The first stage center frequency of the 3 MHz Filter is aligned with the center frequency of the 3 kHz bandwidth The bandpass of each stage of the 3 MHz Filter is adjusted for centering and symmetry while the spectrum analyzer is in the 1 kHz bandwidth The LO NULL capacitor in the Up Down Converter is adjusted for minimum 18 4 MHz LO signal to the Step Gain Amplifier This signal is monitored in the Bandwidth Filter No 2 Assembly DC GAIN in the Up Down Converter is adjusted to set the amplitude of the 1 kHz bandwidth relative to the amplitude of the 1 MHz bandwidth The 3 kHz and 1 kHz bandwidth amplitudes are then adjusted to the 1 kHz bandwidth amplitude The 1 kHz 3 kHz and 1 kHz bandwidths 3 dB points are measured to ensure that they are within tolerance 1 1 PROBE OSCILLOSCOPE CAL OUTPUT Figure 5 62 Option 100 Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Test Setup EQUIPMENT Oscilloscope Dina sober dauid toL PESCE e ea a Yr ed HP 1740A f t Divider Probe vec end RARE HOE eee HP 10007D 5 100 Model 8565A Adjustments e ADJUSTMENTS 5 33 OPTION 100 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d
19. 2 Looking at the front of the unit remove the right side cover Loosen both end connectors of the rigid coax cable that is connected to the attenuator input Disconnect the cable connected to the attenuator input Loosen both end connectors of the rigid coax cable that is connected to the attenuator output Disconnect the cable connected to the attenuator output Disconnect the ribbon cable connector from the attenuator driver PC board assembly 9 Remove the two screws and lock washers securing the attenuator front mounting and rear mounting brackets to the module chassis Lift the attenuator out of the module Remove the allen screws and lock washers securing the mounting brackets to the attenuator Replacement For the location of the callouts in this procedure see Figure 1 Installation Note 5958 7185 1 Secure the new mounting bracket part number 5021 9372 with two screws HP part number 3030 0638 and two washers HP part number 2190 0654 to the ribbon cable socket end of the attenuator 1 Secure the bracket previously removed from the old attenuator opposite the ribbon connector end to the same end of the new attenuator using the old bracket screws and washers 2 The allen screws should be torqued to a recommended three inch pounds with a 8 allen wrench Connect the female connector of the ribbon cable HP part number 5062 0701 or 5062 0703 for HP 70907A to the atte
20. A M MM 5 33 OPTION 100 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d m Disconnect oscilloscope probe and adjust A26C32 SYM and A26C33 CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass on spectrum analyzer CRT display n Check that RESOLUTION BW is set to 1 kHz Disconnect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal from INPUT 500 connector Set INPUT ATTEN to 0 dB REF LEVEL to 50 dBm REF LEVEL FINE to 12 and FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to ZERO SPAN o Connect oscilloscope probe to A23TP1 in the Bandwidth Filter No 2 Assembly and adjust A25C24 LO NULL for minimum signal amplitude p Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 500 connector Set REF LEVEL to 0 dBm RESOLUTION BW to 1 MHz and FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to PER DIV q Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to set 100 MHz signal peak on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line r Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz center signal on CRT and adjust A25R20 DC GAIN to set 100 MHz signal peak on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line If adjustment does not have enough range change value of factory selected resistor A25R23 An increase in resistance increases signal amplitude s Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz and adjust A26R53 100 Hz GAIN to set 100 MHz signal peak on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line t Set RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz and check 100 MHz signal peak is within 0 5 dB of REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line If not change value of factory selected resistor A26R54 An increase in resistance increases signal amplitude u Set
21. A26R46 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz A26R48 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz A26R49 Option 100 Selected for 3 kHz RESOLUTION BW signal amplitude same as 1 kHz RESOLUTION BW signal amplitude A26R54 Option 100 A26R64 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz A27R3 Selected to shift adjustment range of A24R4 RF GAIN Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 30 kHz A27R23 A27R43 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 100 kHz Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 30 kHz A27R48 Selected to shift for correct adjustment range for REF LEVEL CAL A28R2 Selected to provide correct gain compensation of the 5 8 12 9GHz FREQUENCY BAND A28R19 Selected to provide correct gain compensation of the 5 8 12 9GHz FREQUENCY BAND A28R21 Selected to provide correct gain compensation of the 10 5 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND A28R23 5 12 Model 8565A Adjustments e Table 5 3 Related Adjustments 1 of 2 Assembly Changed or Repaired Bezel Display Display Switch Display Adjust Z Axis Amplifier Y Deflect
22. ZEE 10 LL TT rm wd SWEEP TIME DIV Y FREQ SPAN DIV 0 2 div Figure 4 8 Residual FM to AM Conversion Display un RES BW REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE poke He ZI TU goa m urrpererqrerpemmeemeeen pene ERES P P HH RESIDUAL 3590 2 AN 0 amp SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 4 9 Residual FM Display 4 21 Performance Tests 4 12 PERFORMANCE TESTS RESIDUAL FM TEST Cont d Unstabilized k 4 22 Set FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to PER DIV FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 kHz pull to uncouple and RESOLUTION BW to 30 kHz Set SWEEP TRIGGER to FREE RUN and press AUTO STABILIZER to OFF pushbutton in Locate 1 8 GHz comb tooth and center it on CRT Press AUTO STABILIZER to ON pushbutton out to return to stabilized mode Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place signal peak at top graticule line Carefully adjust TUNING control so upward slope of signal intersects the CENTER FREQUENCY graticule line one division down from the top as shown in Figure 4 8 Note the distance from the signal skirt at the horizontal graticule center line to the CENTER FREQUENCY graticule line should be approximately 1 3 divisions Div Determine the test limit using formula given in step f Use unstabilized specification 10 kHz and 10 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV Test Limit _ _____ Div per One Horizontal Division Typica
23. 1 of lowest frequency in range Range 5 ns to 10 sec Output 1V peak 50 Ohm Accuracy 0 005 Range 01 to 23 GHz 0 1 to 18 GHz for Incoming Inspection Frequency Markers 10 and 100 MHz Increments up to 5 GHz Range 20 to 10 dBm usable with wave guide thermistor mount Range 20 to 10 dBm Accuracy 1 2 worst case Frequency Range 01 to 18 GHz Frequency Range 18 to 22 GHz Frequency Range 03 to 18 GHz Frequency 300 MHz Mainframe for RF Plug In Model 8565A Table 1 3 Recommended Test Equipment 1 of 3 Recommended Model HP 3490A HP 1740A HP 34111A HP 10004D HP 10007D HP 3312A HP 8002A HP 8460B Opt 001 HP 5340A Opt H10 HP 8406A HP 432A HP 4524 HP 8478B HP K486A HP 8481A HP 140T 8552B 8555A HP 8620C Model 8565A General Information e Table 1 3 Recommended Test Equipment 2 of 3 RF Plug In RF Plug In Sweep Oscillator RF Plug In Svnchronizer Power Splitter Crystal Detector Mixer Adapter Directional Coupler Step Attenuator Step Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Termination Adapter Adapter 2 required Critical Specifications Frequency 2 to 22 GHz 2 to 18 GHz for Incoming Inspection Residual FM 30 kHz in 10 kHz Bandwidth Frequency 01 to 2 4 GHz Mainframe for RF Plug In Frequency 18 to 22 GHz No Substitute Frequency 2 to 18 GHz Attenuation 6 dB each
24. C15 C25 C23 R31 R26 C38 C54 C45 SYM CTR LCCTR LC XTL SYM CTR LC CTR Q D Berl io ew er FZ oi Figure 5 22 Bandwidth Filter Adjustment Locations 5 41 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d PROCEDURE a SetLINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover Crystal Alignment b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 20 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ ee eee nn nnn 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN soy oec me dr rax tae esae Whew p Eve dao 10 dB REF LEVEL xu ER Yo dd Ke dace WE SUR OSA ES 0 dBm REFLEVEL FINE CLP 10 RESOLUTION BW 12559 ee Sie eS See oo x ae ees Bae E ERES 30 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 0 cece cece hn 20 kHz AMPLITUDE SCALE OR RES LIN TUNING Bei ee eater las Lo ape Cad ades bh at 0 100 GHz c Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 500 connector and adjust TUNING control to center 100 MHz signal on CRT display d Connect crystal shorts through cover access holes across each pair of the following test points A23TP1 A23TP2 A27TP1 A27TP2 and A27TP4 A27TPS e Adjust front panel TUNING control to center bandpass spike Figure 5 23 on CRT display CHECK CENTERIN
25. Crystal Detector Same as CONFIGURATION A HP 33330C Adapter loe m Re Baw he OH RET FREE es HP 11525A LGELhI dam EP PII HP 11534A Adapti es vs ao erschien eura enda c Ps a Ne ee weitere Narda 4608 A28 7 51 PIN RES NORM OFF TEST TOP VIEW A28 a ale et a VARIABLE Jig REESE GER C GAIN ppp AMPLIFIER A20 A20 BIAS ASSEMBLY B2A C B4A C B6A D B1A B V3 V4 V5 V6 R5 sn Fi a ci 8 e Ps 8 EI te dili Figure 5 56 Frequency Response Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover _ a M M 5 88 Model 8565A Adjustments 5 31 b ADJUSTMENTS FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 54 CONFIGURATION A and set controls as follows 8565 Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 3 8 8 5 INPUT ATTEN Seen eU LC tid rcd sus d WCET 10 dB REFLEVE rides E ederent ee edes Vedios 0 dBm BEEF LEVEETINE one RS e
26. LINE POWER CABLE SEE TABLE 2 2 FOR HP PART NUMBER Figure 1 1 Model 8565A Spectrum Analyzer With Accessories Supplied Model 8565A General Information SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 INTRODUCTION h SECTION VIII SERVICE contains descriptions of the circuits schematic 1 2 This Operating and Service Manual contains information required to install operate test ad just and service the Hewlett Packard Model 8565A Figure 1 1 shows the instrument and ac cessories supplied This section covers instrument identification description options accessories specifications and other basic information 1 3 This manual is divided into eight sections which provide information as follows a SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION contains the instrument description and specifications as well as the accessory and recommended test equipment list b SECTION INSTALLATION INCOMING INSPECTION contains information relative to receiving inspection preparation for use mounting packing shipping and incoming inspection c SECTION III OPERATION contains instruc tions for operating the instrument d SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS contains information required to verify that instrument performance is in accordance with published specifications e SECTION V ADJUSTMENTS contains information required to properly adjust and align the instrument after repair f SECTION VI REPLACEABLE PARTS contains information
27. Option 100 removes the 1 kHz bandwidth adjustment from A21 Video Assembly For Option 100 the 1 kHz bandwidth adjustment procedure is included with the 3 kHz and 1 kHz bandwidth adjustments in Paragraph 5 33 Perform 3 dB bandwidth adjustment listed in Table 5 8 Maintain the signal peak 7 1 divisions above graticule baseline and adjust for correct bandwidth five divisions above graticule baseline Measure the 3 dB bandwidth with a frequency counter as follows 1 Set SWEEP SOURCE to MAN and connect frequency counter to rear panel 21 4 MHz IF OUTPUT connector 5 45 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d 2 Adjust MANUAL SWEEP control to position CRT trace at lower frequency 3 dB point then upper frequency 3 dB point Note frequency difference between 3 dB points is within 15 of selected RESOLUTION BW If not repeat corresponding 3 dB bandwidth adjustment The 3 dB point is 5 divisions above graticule baseline when signal peak is 7 1 divisions above graticule baseline 3 SetSWEEP SOURCE to INT Table 5 8 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments and Limits RESOLUTION FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT 3 dB BANDWIDTH BW SPAN DIV LIMITS 3 MBz A21R77 3 MHz 2 55 to 3 45 MHz 1 MHz A21R74 1 MHz 0 85 to 1 15 MHz 300 kHz A21R71 300 kHz 255 to 345 kHz 100 kHz A23R19 A23R43 85 to 115 kHz A27R43 A23R23 A23R48 25 5 to 34 5 kHz A27R23 A27R48 10 kHz A21R58 10kHz 8 5 to 11 5 kHz 3 kHz A2
28. The following check probes voltages that if contacted may cause per sonal injury d Check power supply voltages listed in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Low Voltage Power Supplies e Voltage Vdc Tolerance Vdc 0 30 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 15 0 4 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 12 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT Cont d e Adjustment and checks complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and replace 8565A bottom cover 5 13 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 32 DESCRIPTION A high voltage probe is required to measure high voltage CRT cathode supply First the probe accuracy is checked by comparing measurements of the 158 supply with and without the probe in the test setup Any error is then calculated into the test setup for setting high voltage CRT cathode supply The FOCUS LIMIT adjustment is set for a sharply focused display with front panel FOCUS control set at midrange The Intensity Limit adjustment is then set to limit the CRT control grid voltage and in effect limit the maximum CRT trace intensity SPECTRUM ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLTMETER HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE Figure 5 3 High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital Voltmeter eee eee Rn HP 3490A High Voltage Probe 1000 1 34111A Oscillo CODe
29. The tuning control section contains the Frequency Con trol Board YIG driver Digital Panel Meter DPM sweep attenuator and sweep generator The sweep generator provides a sweep voltage that is simultaneously applied to the horizontal deflection ampli fier and the sweep attenuator The sweep attenuator con trolled by the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control reduces the sweep voltage to the Frequency Control Board to maintain a calibrated horizontal scale on the CRT In addition the tuning control voltage which sets the center frequency of the analyzer is also applied to the Frequency Control Board The tuning control voltage and the sweep attenuator voltage are summed and scaled in the Frequen cy Control Board The resultant signal is then applied to the YIG drivers Both the YTF and the YTO have separate YIG drivers which are basically voltage to current con verters A preselector peak adjustment is used to control the offset of the YTF s YIG driver circuit It is adjusted to eliminate any amplitude uncertainty due to mis tracking between the YTF and the YTO A DPM readout displays the frequency represented by the center of the CRT dis play gt REFERENCE LEVEL 65 VIDEO FILTER Detector Log Linear Amplifier Vertical Deflection Amplifier Horizontal Deflection Amplifier 6 External Mixer Range 7 A 4 7
30. Used with FOCUS to obtain smallest spot size on CRT TRACE ALIGN Rotates trace about center of CRT HORIZ POSN Adjusts horizontal position of CRT trace VERT POSN Adjusts vertical position of CRT trace ERASE Removes trace from CRT Operates in WRITE mode only WRITE Allows CRT to write with variable persis tence Used for most applications PERSIST Adjusts fade rate of trace in WRITE mode Used to eliminate trace flickering CONV Conventional non storage short persistence CRT display Useful for observing fast sweeps in ZERO SPAN INTENSITY Adjusts brightness of CRT trace STORE Retains CRT trace at reduced intensity for photography or extended viewing CRT does not write or erase in STORE mode FREQUENCY read out is frozen STORE INTEN Adjusts stored trace intensity for photography or viewing Minimum intensity yields longest storage time SCALE Sequentially erases trace blanks CRT and turns on scale illumination for photography FRE QUENCY readout is frozen SCALE INTEN Adjusts scale illumination for pho tography FOCUS Adjusts sharpness of CRT trace BASELINE CLIPPER Adjusts the vertical level be low which the CRT is blanked Helps prevent bloom ing by blanking the bright baseline of area of CRT Especially useful for pulsed RF and transient signals CAL OUTPUT An internal 100 MHz 10 dBm cal ibration signal SIG IDENT Used to verify frequency of unknown signals
31. With FREQUENCY SPAN DIV at 1 MHz correct response will shift two divisions to the left and be lower in amplitude Especially useful in EXT MIXER bands or when small signals present with large signals ratio 270 dB Note SIG IDENT does not properly identify internal 100 MHz CAL OUT PUT signal VIDEO FILTER Selects post detection low pass fil ters which smooth the trace by averaging random noise The VIDEO FILTER bandwidth is equal to the RESOLUTION BW times the factor indicated on the control knob The NOISE AVC position is a fixed 1 Hz low pass filter used for noise measurements only FREQ CAL Calibrates the FREQUENCY readout to amp known frequency reference FREQUENCY Displays the tuned center frequency of analyzer in PER DIV and ZERO SPAN In full band modes display reads frequency at the tuning marker 22 TROL GLOSSAI 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 FREQUENCY BAND Selects frequency range TUNING Tunes center frequency of analyzer or posi tions marker in full band modes Coarse tuning pro vided by large knob push for normal and pull for rapid Smaller knob provides FINE tuning PRESELECTOR PEAK Adjusts tracking of internal YIG preselector Normally centered in green area for best broadband performance from 1 7 to 22 GHz Used to maximize signals for more accurate amplitude measurements d AUTO STABILIZER Analyzer is automatically sta bilized for narrow frequency spans X100 k
32. band to band owes 3 seus 25 cem c 77 x 7 1 Input level not to exceet 30 dBm damage level 2 100 kHz BW limited to 90 relative humidity Switching between bandwidths 3 MHz to 300 kHz 0 5 dB 3 MHz to 1 kHz 1 0 dB2 Calibrated display range Log expanded from reference level down 70 dB with 10 dB Div scale factor 40 dB with 5 dB Div scale factor 16 dB with 2 dB Div scale factor 8 dB with 1 dB Div scale factor Linear Full scale from 56 V 102 dBm across 50 ohms to 707 volts 70 dBm in 10 dB steps and continuous 0 to 12 dB vernier Full scale signals in linear translate to ap proximately full scale signals in the log modes Display accuracy Log lt 0 1 dB dB but not more than x 1 5 dB over full 70 dB display range Linear 0 1 division over full 8 division deflection Residual responses no signal present at input With 0 dB input attenuation on fundamental mixing 0 01to 4 1 GHz 90 dBm Signal Identifier Provided on all Frequency Bands in 1 MHz Div frequency span for signal identification reads incorrectly for 100 MHz Cal Output signal SWEEP SPECIFICATIONS SWEEP TIME Auto Sweep time is automatically controlled by Frequency Span Div Resolution Bandwidth and Video Filter controls to maintain an absolute amplitude calibrated display Calibrated Sweep times 21 internal sweep times from 2 uSec Div
33. step h If center of bandpass is greater than two divisions from center of oscilloscope display perform second converter coarse bandpass adjustment as follows l Set FREQ SPAN DIV to 50 MHz and loosen lock nut on A35C1 and A35C3 Carefully turn tuning screws clockwise until they bottom on cavity 2 A35C1 and A35C3 one turn counterclockwise and lightly tighten lock nuts 3 Carefully set 5 112 2ND MIXER MATCH fully clockwise then adjust it two turns counter clockwise 4 Tune A35C2 to position signal at center of oscilloscope display this will be a dip of approxi mately 0 2 divisions 5 62 Model 8565A Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 25 SECOND CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d 5 Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 5 MHz and adjust A35C1 for maximum negative signal at center of oscilloscope display 6 Adjust A35C3 and A35A1L2 for maximum negative signal at center of oscilloscope display 100 0 5 DIV 6 MHz a 5 MHz DIV b 1 MHz DIV Figure 5 36 Second Converter Bandpass Displays Repetitively adjust in small increments A35C1 A35C2 A35C3 and A35AIL2 for a centered symmetrical and flat bandpass display with maximum amplitude as shown in Figure 5 36a A slight amount of signal amplitude must be sacrificed in order to obtain the desired bandwidth symmetry and flatness Check that right bandpass skirt is at least 50 percent down at a point 10 MHz from center frequency See Figure 5
34. the most significant one for microwave analyzers is usually the stability residual FM or drift of an oscillator For this reason the HP External Mixer 2nd Converter Frequency Control Unit Figure 44 HP 8565A block diagram 26 8565A utilizes an automatic stabilization circuit that locks the YTO to a 1 MHz crystal reference oscillator The lock is automatically engaged when frequency spans of 100 kHz DIV or less are selected The AUTO STABILIZER can be disabled by a pushbutton switch located on the front panel An added feature to the automatic stabiliza tion circuit is the use of offset compensation to maintain the signal of interest fixed on the CRT during stabiliza tion The circuit is designed such that the YTO is not moved when it is locked to the reference oscillator Since there is no frequency shift in the YTO the displayed signal will not shift either This eliminates the need for the user to retune the signal on the CRT once it has been stabilized IF SECTION The IF section consists of components in the signal path after the first mixer The output from the first mixer is either 321 4 MHz or 2050 MHz Signals at 321 4 MHz bypass the second converter whereas a 2050 MHz signal would mix with the second LO at 1 7286 GHz to also produce a 321 4 MHz IF At the third converter the 321 4 MHz IF is amplified filtered and mixed with the third LO at 300 MHz to produce a final IF of 2
35. 29 PRELIMINARY BIAS ADJUSTMENT Cont d PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 47 and set controls as follows 8565 Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 5 8 12 9 INPUT ATTEN berate yb eed bee aed EFT apa 10 dB REP LEVEL cts chee us Boe FRE EE TUE Bg tes ecd ra Urt QU 0 dBm REF LEVEL PINE oes RETE urea eras nA Der t 4 FREQUENCY SPAN FULL BAND AMPLITUDE 5 dB LOG DIV SWEEP SOURCE vasos dye Ed best aic Bc cene Ad o EXT PRESELBCTOR Centered in green 8620C 86290A H08 BAND reseau aka ek avide M oL eap xe cou Band 4 MARKER SWEEP pushbutton Depress START MARKER pointer 5 8 GHz STOP MARKER 12 9 GHz SWEEP TIME SECONDS 1 01 SWEEP TIME SECONDS vernier Fully counterclockwise RO eR EXAM I E ede ON AEC i ota ba yao UN Oe Pap tara See Beebe eS etus ea eR EXT POWERLBVEEL ccs eka ieee ob AER PN EA eS Midrange RFBLANKING OFF RF BLANKING DISPLAY
36. 36a Adjust oscilloscope vertical gain for a 4 division peak to peak display and set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz Check flatness of bandpass within 3 MHz 3 divisions each side of center See Figure 5 36b Bandpass should be flat within 0 5 divisions 1 dB Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord reconnect W18 and install 8565A bottom cover 5 63 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 26 THIRD CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service sheet 8 DESCRIPTION The third converter L O is adjusted for maximum output power and the front panel CAL OUTPUT is calibrated for 10 dBm A spectrum analyzer is used to display the 300 MHz local oscillator signal at the 21 4 MHz output port and the 300 MHz bandpass filter is adjusted for maximum 300 MHz local oscillator signal The 321 4 MHz bandpass filter is checked with an oscilloscope If the resonant cavities are not closely tuned to 321 4 MHz the bandpass filter must be detuned and each cavity tuned to 321 4 MHz POWER OSCILLOSCOPE METER HORIZONTAL SPECTRUM ANALYZER SWEEP OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT CRYSTAL DETECTOR TO A37J2 A37J3 Figure 5 37 Third Converter Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT nnt HP 1740A Spectrum Analyzer 6 eee ee eee eee ee n n HP 140T 8552B 8554B Power Meter ccc cee cet hh III tti HP 432A Thermistor Mou
37. 4 5 V for the right edge Output impedance is 5kQ Vertical Output Y axis Detected video output proportional to vertical deflection of the CRT trace Output increases 100 mV div from 0 to 800 mV from a 509 source for a full 8 division deflection Output impedance is 509 Blank Penlift or Z axis Output A blanking output 15 V from 10 kQ which occurs during CRT retrace or when sweeping beyond band edges Otherwise output is low at OV with a 100 output impedance for a normal or unblanked trace pen down Blanking Input Permits remote Z axis control of CRT with TTL Levels normal lt 0 5V or open circuit blanked 72V 10 kQ input impedance Caution maximum input x 40V External Sweep Input When the front panel Sweep Source switch is set to the EXT mode a 0 to 10V ramp will sweep the analyzer through the frequency range determined by front panel Tuning and Frequency Span Div controls 100 kQ input impedance Caution maximum input 40 V External Trigger Input With the Sweep Trigger in EXT mode a signal will trigger a sweep on the signal s positive slope between 1 and 10 volts according to the setting of the Trigger Level control 100 kQ input impedance dc coupled Caution maximum input X 40V 21 4 MHz IF Output A 50 ohm 21 4 MHz output linearly re lated to the RF input to the analyzer Bandwidth controlled by the analyzer s Resolution Bandwidth setting amplitude con trolled by the Input Attenuator IF gain ver
38. 6 See Figure 2 9 Remove two screws 7 to free the card cage from the module 10 Swing the center end of the card cage out just far enough to gain access to the ribbon cable connectors Release and disconnect the ribbon cable 11 Remove two screws 8 to allow separation of the card cage board assemblies 12 Disconnect the attenuator cable 9 at the back of the control board assembly Replacement 1 Connect the female connector of the new ribbon cable HP part number 5062 0703 to the new attenuator male connector 2 Connect the other end of the new ribbon cable 9 at the back of the control board assembly 3 Position the A5 A6 board assembly in the cage frame then replace two screws 8 4 Replace two screws 7 Note Verify that the connectors at the rear of the card cage are pressed firmly into place before positioning the cage the module frame Also be sure the three 9 coaxial cables are on the bottom and against the third converter these cables can be damaged if not carefully positioned Installation Note 5958 7185 7 OO N eo Carefully position the card cage in the module frame and swing the cage inward just far enough to allow the ribbon cable to be reconnected and clamped Close the cage Replace two screws 6 then replace three screws 5 Position the attenuator and reconnect but do not tighten SMA connecto
39. A16R74 is then ad justed to trigger sweep retrace when the sweep ramp reaches 5 volts To accurately determine sweep ramp voltage slow sweep time per division by setting VIDEO FILTER to 003 when CRT trace is within one half division of right graticule edge Depress START RESET pushbutton to start sweep When trace is within one half division of right graticule edge set VIDEO FILTER to 003 Note digital voltmeter indication just prior to sweep retrace maximum positive sweep ramp voltage Adjust AI6R74 SWP STOP for a maximum sweep ramp voltage step of 5 00 volts 0 01 volts A clockwise adjustment of A16R74 will increase the sweep ramp voltage required to trigger retrace Set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN oid cix CO bar I bu SAM Rime Rie dd eau Tu 10 dB REP EEVELD beet e duds cud oda red Vicodin 10 dBm REP LEVEL FINE rac EE QE RR IIS 0 RESOLUTION BW 3MHz FREQUENCY 5 500 MHz SWEEP TIME DI V uro t Er RR ao rt tec x eta ci os res 1 mSEC 2 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS nC EEE 5 22 SWEEP GENERATOR ADJUSTMENTS Cont d NOTE The HP 1740A oscilloscope is externally swept by selecting Ius sweep mode and connecting 8565A HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUT to oscil loscope Channel B input
40. Adjustable Components 5 of 8 e Reference Adjustment Adjustment Service Performance Descrinti Designator Name Paragraph Sheet Tests eseripuon A22R2 LOG LIN Adjusts for Log to linear full screen display translations A22R3 LIN GAIN Adjusts Log Amplifier for 10 dB gain steps when in Linear Mode A23C15 SYM Adjusts symmetry of first stage of crystal bandwidth filter A23C23 Adjusts centering of first stage of LC bandwidth filter A23C25 Adjusts centering of first stage of crystal bandwidth filter A23C38 Adjusts symmetry of second stage of crystal bandwidth filter A23C45 Adjusts centering of second stage of LC bandwidth filter A23C54 Adjusts centering of second stage of e crystal bandwidth filter A23C73 Compensates for capacitance of CR3 A23C74 Compensates for capacitance of CR11 A23R26 Adjusts feedback in LC circuit of bandpass filter A23R31 Adjusts feedback in crystal circuit of bandpass filter Adjusts second 20 dB gain step Adjusts first 20 dB gain step Adjusts 10 dB gain step Adjusts overall gain of IF Assembly Adjusts to calibrate O dB position of REF LEVEL FINE control Adjusts to calibrate 12 dB position e of REF LEVEL FINE control Model 8565A Adjustments Table 5 1 Adjustable Components 6 of 8 Reference Adjustment Adjustment Service Performance Designator Name Paragraph Sheet Tests A24C35 Sets frequency of the 18 4 MHz Op
41. B2C to set best line at the center horizontal graticule line with minimum slope Set sweep oscillator LINE switch OFF and replace 86290A RF Plug in test setup Figure 5 54 CONFIGURATION A with 86222 RF Plug in Set sweep oscillator LINE switch ON POWER LEVEL to midrange ALC switch to EXT and rear panel FM NORM PL switch to PL Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 01 1 8 GHz Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 01 GHz to 1 8 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator and set output power level according to step w Adjust A20R7 B1A and A20RS8 BIB to set best line at the center horizontal graticule line with minimum slope Adjustment complete Proceed to 5 32 Absolute Amplitude Calibration 5 97 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 32 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE CALIBRATION REFERENCE Service Sheet 20 DESCRIPTION The 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal is displayed on the spectrum analyzer CRT screen Factory selected resistor A28R2 is selected so that REF LEVEL CAL functions over the range that optimizes noise and distortion performance SPECTRUM ANALYZER CAL INPUT OUTPUT Figure 5 60 Absolute Amplitude Calibration Test Setup o TOP VIEW A28 A28R2 A28 ijs e VARIABLE B Het Ax GAIN Se DIES Eee AMPLIFIER 980 p tlie we Mun p ELI IE Figure 5 61 Absolute Amplitude Calibration Adjustment Locations
42. Configuration B NOTE If an extended range sweep oscillator 8620C 86290A H08 is available only the test equipment listed for CONFIGURATION A Figure 5 54 is required A standard 8620C 86290A sweep oscillator may substituted but then equipment listed for both CONFIGURATION A and B Figure 5 55 is required CONFIGURATION A Figure 5 54 Sweep HP 8620C 86290A H08 RE Plugin a d e ie mele d HP 86222A SynchronIZeE ex o uk iub Ru ARN HA eee aie ire ace tee ad HP 8709 H10 Function Generator llle hh n HP 3312A Power Metetu esu e RII Rie BET RS Eee nies PR ea TE HP 435A Power HP 11667A Option 002 PowerSensOor cuu s c de Rer RR ae RE HP 8481A Crystal Detector resp E RUSO AIR sonata er eg HP 33330C Adapter APC 7 to N HP 11525A Adapter APC 7 to SMA Female 11534 Adapter APC 7 to Type N 11524 5 87 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d CONFIGURATION B Figure 5 55 Sweep Oscillator eu e UH hehe HP 8690B 8696A Power Meter ilr VA Ru eei eate Pls HP 432A Power Splitter Same as CONFIGURATION A HP 11667A Option 002 Thermistor Mount 0 ccc eee cee eee ene mh HP K486A
43. Inputs we Overloading the input with too much power peak voltages or dc voltages will damage the input circuit and require expensive repairs LOW IMPEDANCE AC A source with less than 50 O nominal output impedance can produce excessive current which may damage the input circuit of the analyzer DC PRECAUTIONS The HP 8565A cannot accept DC voltages in 0 dB INPUT ATTEN With 10 dB or greater INPUT ATTEN on DC 1 7 22 GHz gt Step Attenuator Limiter 500 DC 210 dB Input Atten p 870 DC 01 1 8 GHz YIG Preselector small DC voltages lt 7 V can be accepted without damage if the total power AC and DC does not exceed 1 watt The input is direct coupled and its DC input resistance varies from 0 to 87 O depending on the INPUT ATTEN and FREQUENCY BAND selected Refer to Figure 40 If large DC components are present with AC signals a blocking capacitor should be used at the INPUT of the analyzer to eliminate the DC components Note Input signal distortion may occur if DC voltages are applied in excess of those shown in the table below MAXIMUM DC Voltage INPUT ATTEN without distortion dB Pad 6 dB Pad Figure 40 DC block diagram 21 i i Appendix B FRONT PANEL 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 LINE AC line switch Turns instrument ON OFF ASTIG
44. LEVEL vict i eh ru ia ata daa a 70 dBm REF LEVEL FINE araen gea cme ek Cp XR x tdt ova kk ra Ra a 0 RESOLUTION BW sc Sg ah aci x br Pp 1 kHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN DIV e ea cb deeds tes F SWEEP TRIGGER 5 IRL one poset eC ed kore DO DU e XE SINGLE SWEEP TIME DIV oer eser ant CE YUOCY Ehe noted Se a ade 2 SEC VIDEO FILTER PEG pestes ees de dab aw ved d er RON 003 PERSIST eia lr 4 ve irae beh aie Xo sak QU DR Fully Clockwise EN TENSE ches eran eee hea Fully Counterclockwise TUNING sca a ve Fah tte eq ee tense RIA i the 0 900 GHz Press START RESET pushbutton and adjust INTENSITY control until trace appears on CRT Press ERASE pushbutton and again press START RESET pushbutton When first sweep is ended press 1 7 4 1 FREQUENCY BAND GHz pushbutton and then START RESET pushbutton Continue pressing the next FREQUENCY BAND GHz pushbutton and then START RESET pushbutton at the end of each sweep until all of the internal mixer frequency bands dark gray pushbuttons have been swept Press STORE and adjust STORE INTEN control as required Observe the six individual traces and determine the maximum average noise level for each internal mixing FREQUENCY BAND See Figure 4 11 Disregard LO feedthrough signal at beginning of 01 1 8 GHz band Record results in Table 4 5 Average Noise Level Option 200 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS
45. MHz TUNING S 5 Geo le PEE Ph IP USE n EROR Baie ae ePi 0 100 GHz b Connect spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 50Q Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB LOG DIV and center signal on CRT d Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to position peak of 100 MHz signal at seventh division from bottom graticule line e Change the RESOLUTION BW and FREQUENCY SPAN DIV controls in accordance with Table 4 13 Record the change in amplitude for each RESOLUTION BW setting Changes in amplitude above reference level set in step d are positive Changes below reference level are negative f find the overall variation in Table 4 13 algebraically subtract the greatest negative change in amplitude from the greatest positive change in amplitude If all changes in amplitude are of the same sign the overall variation is the largest positive or largest negative change in amplitude The overall variation between 3 MHz and 300 kHz RESOLUTION BW settings should be x 1 0 dB 0 5 dB The overall variation between 3 MHz and 1 kHz 3 MHz and 1 kHz for Option 100 RESOLUTION BW settings should be x 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 4 46 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 21 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY SWITCHING BETWEEN BANDWIDTHS TEST Cont d Table 4 13 Amplitude Accuracy Switching Between Bandwidths Overall RESOLUTION FREQUENCY sig einn ane sett p ind Amplitude 3 MHz and 300 kHz 3 MHz and 1 kHz n nM dB RESOLUTION BW S
46. Option 100 see Service Sheet 40 DESCRIPTION First the GAIN is adjusted in the Y Deflection Amplifier Assembly to place the signal on the REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line of the CRT witha specified voltage at the input to the Video Assembly Then the LOG LIN is adjusted in the Log Amplifier Assembly so that the signal remains at the REFERENCE LEVEL line as the AMPLITUDE SCALE is switched between LIN and 10 dB DIV Finally the OFFSET is adjusted in the Video Assembly so that the signal remains at the REFERENCE LEVEL line as the AMPLITUDE SCALE is switched between 10 dB DIV and 5 2 or 1 dB DIV SPECTRUM ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLTMETER Figure 5 18 Video Offset Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital Voltm ter ze pc p ae ILE HP 3490A 5 37 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 19 VIDEO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT Cont d A21 STANDARD TOP VIEW A21TP5 A21R92 A21 22 VIDEO Pau VIDEO LOG AMPLIFIER x wi E m 2 es iie ar NES aCe ols i EE DI QUO SM acus PIC e ar HET ee SE Y DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER A21 OPTION 100 A21TP5 A21R92 Figure 5 19 Video Offset Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 18 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all N
47. Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Cont d Disconnect thermistor mount from power splitter and connect measured port of power splitter to spectrum analyzer INPUT 509 Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB LOG DIV Set TUNING control to each frequency recorded in Table 4 12 and record CRT Horizontal Displacement of marker number of divisions from far left graticule line for each setting See example Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 2 dB LOG DIV Set TUNING control for any frequency less than 18 GHz Set sweep cscillator to manually triggered sweep function and adjust band edges to cover 18 GHz to 22 GHz Set sweep time for slowest sweep 100 seconds Press spectrum analyzer ERASE pushbutton and set PERSIST control fully clockwise Trigger the sweep oscillator and slowly adjust sweep time vernier for display similar to that of Figure 4 19 STORE display and read greatest positive and negative deviations from center horizontal graticule line Pos Deviation Neg Deviation Read deviation from horizontal graticule line at each CRT Horizontal Displacement and record Actual Deviations in Table 4 12 Algebraically subtract Peak Deviation from CRT Actual Deviation for each setting in Table 4 12 Record results in Corrected Deviation column See example In cluding results from steps t and y and Corrected Deviation from Table 4 12 record the greatest positive and negative deviations Frequency response dev
48. RESI RV DE CURE IPTE 100 MHz c Connect oscilloscope probe to A25 pin 31 and check 18 4 MHz LO signal is approximately 22 millivolts peak to peak 10 dBm If LO signal is less than 22 millivolts peak to peak decrease value of factory selected resistor A24R55 minimum value 383 ohms d Set RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz and adjust front panel TUNING and FINE TUNING controls e to center 100 MHz signal on spectrum analyzer CRT display e Connect oscilloscope probe to A26TP3 Figure 5 63 and set RESOLUTION BW switch to 1 kHz NOTE A non metallic tuning tool is required for all crystal filter and LO adjustments f Adjust A26C3 CTR for minimum signal amplitude on oscilloscope display g Adjust A24C35 Fg 100 Hz Bw to center signal on oscilloscope display h Repeat steps d through g until no further adjustment is necessary i Adjust A26C2 SYM and A26C3 CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass on oscilloscope display j Connect oscilloscope probe to A26TP5 and adjust A26C12 SYM and A26C13 CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass on oscilloscope display k Connect oscilloscope probe to A26TP7 and adjust A26C19 SYM and A26C20 CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass on oscilloscope display 1 Connect oscilloscope probe to A26TP9 and adjust A26C25 SYM and A26C26 CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass on oscilloscope display 5 102 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS H H
49. RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 kHz and AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN Connect frequency counter to rear panel 21 4 MHz IF OUTPUT connector v Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to set 100 MHz signal peak 7 1 divisions above graticule line NOTE When signal peak is set to 7 1 divisions the 3 dB bandwidth points are located five divisions above the baseline graticule w Measure 3 dB bandwidth for each RESOLUTION BW listed in Table 5 12 as follows 1 Set SWEEP SOURCE to MAN 2 Adjust MANUAL SWEEP control to position trace on lower frequency 3 dB point Note frequency counter indiction Frequency_____ MHz 5 103 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 33 OPTION 100 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d 3 Adjust MANUAL SWEEP control to position trace on upper frequency 3 dB point Note fre quency counter indication Frequency MHz 4 Subtract frequency noted in step 2 from frequency noted in step 3 This frequency difference is the 3 dB bandwidth check that it is within the 3 dB bandwidth limits listed in Table 5 12 5 If the 1 kHz RESOLUTION BW is out of tolerance change the values of factory selected re sistors listed in Table 5 12 These resistors must be changed in pairs shown by parentheses and the parallel resistance of any pair should not vary more than 10 percent from the parallel resistance of any other pair 6 Ifthe 3 kHz or 1 kHz RESOLUTION BW is out of tolerance change the values of the fact
50. SCALE to 5 dB LOG DIV REF LEVEL to 70 dBm VIDEO FILTER to 03 and FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 kHz o y Set function generator frequency to 4 00 02 kHz Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between fifth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 1 2 divisions z Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 kHz Set function generator frequency to 2 00 02 kHz and adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position one spectral line at grati cule reference line Measure error between fifth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 1 2 divisions 4 10 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATION Individual resolution bandwidth 3 dB points lt 15 DESCRIPTION Resolution bandwidth accuracy is measured in the linear mode to eliminate log amplifier errors Since half power is represented by a voltage ratio of 1 41 5 divisions on the spectrum analyzer display represents half power 3 dB points for a 7 1 division display Voltage Ratio XP xpiv 2101 M oe 1 41 7 1 DIV 1 4 oon 4 11 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 10 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d In the narrow bandwidths 10 kHz and below a 321 4 MHz signal first IF is injected by connecting the output of the signal g
51. SPAN is used when it is desired to recover the modulation on a carrier In ZERO SPAN there is no sweep voltage applied to the LO in the analyzer hence it oper ates as a manually tuned receiver Carrier modulation will be displayed in the time domain and the calibrated SWEEP TIME DIV control can be used manually to read the time variation of the signal Selecting VIDEO trigger will allow the sweep to be synchronized on the demodulated wave form Figure 7 is a display of a demodulated AM carrier that was obtained with the analyzer in ZERO SPAN Since the analyzer remains calibrated in ZERO SPAN it is also possible to measure the amplitude and frequency of a CW signal In this case the CW signal appears as a hori zontal line on the CRT see Figure 8 Using a wide RES OLUTION BW setting and disabling the AUTO STABI LIZER will allow the signal to be tuned to easily TROL RES BW REF LEVEL 1 MH 26 dm INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE NE UT 00 v sq 0 80 1 SWEEP TiME DIV FREQUENCY O k Hef FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 7 AM carrier demodulated in ZERO SPAN RES Bw REF LEVEL 3 MHz 17 dm INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE Q dBRITEN ob A 2 450 SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY D Mhl FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 8 CW measurement in ZERO SPAN Per Div The PER DIV mode enables the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control to set the horizontal frequency calibration of the CRT The calibrated FREQUENCY SPAN DI
52. Setsweep oscillator amplitude marker to 18 GHz and note level of spectrum analyzer trace coincident with marker Disconnect 8620C sweep oscillator output from 8565A INPUT 500 r Connect 8690B 8696A as shown in Figure 5 55 CONFIGURATION B and set sweep oscillator for a e CW frequency of 18 GHz s Set 8565A SWEEP SOURCE to INT and adjust 8690B 8696A sweep oscillator power level for same 18 GHz signal level noted in step q e A MM 5 91 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d t Characterize sweep oscillator output as follows 1 Disconnect power splitter from spectrum analyzer INPUT 509 and connect power meter to power splitter output Note power level at 18 GHz then slowly tune sweep oscillator from 18 GHz to 22 GHz and note all peak deviations and frequencies at which they occur from power level at 18 GHz Record fre quencies and deviations in Table 5 11 see example Reconnect power splitter output to 8565A INPUT 50Q and set 8690B 8696A sweep oscillator for a manually triggered start stop sweep of 18 GHz to 22 GHz with a sweep time of 100 seconds Set 8565A PERIST control fully clockwise and press ERASE pushbutton Trigger sweep oscillator start stop sweep and adjust sweep time vernier for display similar to that of Figure 5 58 STORE display on spectrum analyzer CRT Record deviations from signal leve
53. VERT POSN to place the CRT trace on a horizontal graticule line near center of CRT 2 Red ce INTENSITY and depress both INT E and EXT SWEEP SOURCE to produce a dot on the CRT Caution Leaving a dot on the CRT for pro longed periods at high intensity may burn the phosphor 3 ae ASTIG and FOCUS for the smallest round ot DJUSTMENT 25 4 Adjust HORIZ POSN to center dot on the CRT Reset to INT SWEEP SOURCE 5 Adjust TRACE ALIGN so that the trace is parallel to a horizontal graticule line 6 Adjust VERT POSN to re position baseline on the bottom graticule line FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT and center signal on CRT with TUNING control Adjust FREQ CAL to indicate 0 100 GHz on FREQUENCY read out AMPLITUDE ADJUSTMENT Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB DIV O Adjust REF LEVEL CAL to position the peak of the signal on the REFERENCE LEVEL top graticule line of the CRT Once the Front Panel Adjustment Procedure is com pleted the CRT display should look similar to Figure 43 INPUT ATTEN 1 0 BANEN LOG SCALE di RES BW 10 k He REF LEVEL 10 da A 0 100 5H FREQUENCY 200 k Hl SWEEP TIME DIV FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 43 CAL OUTPUT signal Reset the AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB DIV ta The HP 8565A is now calibrated for absolute frequency and amplitude measurement Appendix D SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION The HP 8565
54. YIG Tuned Filter YTF is swept around the center frequency This results in the YTF passband being displayed on the CRT screen YTF tracking adjustments are performed to keep the YTF passband approximately centered around the center frequency vertical graticule line over the full frequency range of the spectrum analyzer 5 81 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 30 YTF TRACKING ADJUSTMENT Cont d SPECTRUM ANALYZER SWEEP OSCILLATOR SWEEP OSCILLATOR Te ee ae INPUT 5022 Figure 5 51 YTF Tracking Adjustment Test Setup TOP VIEW A17 YTF OFFSET R43 R50 R57 R64 N2 N3 5 amp 735 8 BF amp AV Ef LGB URS e GE E f i a FORO ESSO RO CONTROL Figure 5 52 YTF Tracking Adjustment Locations 5 82 A19 R14 A19 LIN YIG DRIVER YTF OFFSET _ _ ASSEMBLY S1 R17 R39 R42 R45 R48 R51 Ai YTF TRACK YTF GAIN 13 16 18 20 22 FREQUENCY Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 30 TRACKING ADJUSTMENT Cont d EQUIPMENT NOTE If an extended range sweep oscillator 8620C 86290A H08 is available the 8690B 8696A sweep oscillator is not required Sweep Oscillator 2 18 2 HP 8620C 86290A Sweep Oscillator 18 22 2 HP 8690B 8696A Adapter Waveguide to SMA Jack een eens Narda 4608 PROCEDURE NOTE Allow at
55. a s dc ies ce x iw be es Hie REOR ES HP 1740A 10 1 Divider Probe 2 ec ee ee m ntn HP 10004D To minimize shock hazard use a non metallic screwdriver for ad justments on A8 High Voltage Power Supply and A9 High Voltage Oscillator WARNING The following procedure probes voltages that if contacted may cause personal injury or death 5 17 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 13 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT Cont d NOTE Adjustment of the High Voltage Power Supply should not be a routine maintenance procedure Adjustment should only be done when the HV Power Supply or HV Oscillator is repaired or replaced NOTE If an assembly or an adjustable component is replaced set all ad justments on the replaced assembly to midrange except A9R1 INT which should not be changed before turning the instrument on If the CRT is replaced set front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise before applying power TOP VIEW A9R1 INT A8R13 FOCUS LIMIT A8 A8R13 FOCUS LIMIT Figure 5 4 High Voltage Power Supply and Oscillator Driver Adjustment Locations 5 18 o Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 13 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT Cont d PROCEDURE WARNING After disconnecting AC line power cord allow a minimum of 30 seconds for High Voltage Power Supply to discharge before removing High Voltage Power Supply protective cover
56. control fully counterclockwise Adjust AF control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 4 Repeat steps ai 1 through ai 3 until no further adjustment is necessary 5 Disconnect power splitter from 8565A INPUT 500 connector and connect power meter to power splitter output e 6 Set 8565 AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB and note that CRT trace can be manually swept with sweep oscillator manual sweep control Manually sweep spectrum analyzer CRT trace from left graticule edge 10 5 GHz to six and one half divisions 18 GHz and adjust sweep oscillator power level for an average power meter reading of 8 dBm over this range 7 Disconnect power meter and reconnect power splitter output to 8565A INPUT 50 Set 8565A AMPLITUDE SCALE to 2 dB 8 Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phase locked spectrum analyzer CRT display If system is breaking phase lock repeat steps ai 1 through ai 4 aj Adjust A20R19 B6A A20R22 B6B and A20R21 B6C to set best line at the center horizontal graticule line with minimum slope Do this for the first 6 5 divisions of sweep ak Adjust A20R6 V6 for minimum amplitude variations of upper edge of envelope for first 6 5 divisions of CRT trace Repeat step aj al Perform steps q through t am Use corrected deviation data step t 7 to determine approximate slope of corrected CRT trace Adjust A20R20 B6D to set the best line at the center horizontal graticule line with minimum slo
57. display flickering between 0 000 GHz and 0 001 GHz m Switch FREQUENCY BAND to 8 5 18 GHz and adjust front panel TUNING control for 10 0000V 0 0002V at AI7TP5 CENT FREQ n Adjust AI2R18 REF ADJ for a CENTER FREQUENCY display of 10 000 GHz Bezel Readout Digit Intensity Adjustment Adjust A39R40 DIG INT for equal intensity of digits and annunciators on bezel digital readout display A39R40 is accessible through vent holes in instrument side cover SetLINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565 top cover 5 56 Model 8565A Adjustments e ADJUSTMENTS ee ERN c PR 5 24 YIG DRIVER ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 14 DESCRIPTION The YIG Tuned Oscillator YTO output frequency is calibrated by supplying a known tuning voltage and adjusting YTO offset and gain adjustments for the correct 1st Local Oscillator output frequency The YIG Tuned Filter YTF offset and gain adjustments are performed to track the YTF bandpass with the YTO frequency NOTE Allow at least 1 hour warm up before performing YIG Driver Ad justments COMB DIGITAL VOLTMETER FREQUENCY COUNTER GENERATOR SPECTRUM oe ANALYZER A19TP1 OUTPUT Figure 5 31 YIG Driver Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital Voltmeter 2 0 06 RI HP 3490A Frequency Counter seen HP 5340A Comb Generator cece eee eee nnn n nnn EE HP 8406A D 10 dBAttenuator ee
58. display on CRT screen t Disconnect shorts to ground from A23TP3 and A23TP6 Set 2151 NORM TEST switch to NORM Set RESOLUTION BW to 30 kHz and FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 kHz Adjust TUNING control to center bandpass display on CRT screen u Switch RESOLUTION BW from 30 kHz to 10 kHz and check signal shift does not exceed 3 kHz 1 5 divisions If signal shift is out of tolerance repeat steps b through 1 Switch RESOLUTION BW from 30 kHz to 100 kHz and check signal shift does not exceed 10 kHz 5 divisions If signal shift is out of tolerance repeat steps m through u Bandwidth Amplitude v Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 kHz and AUTO STABILIZER on w Adjust FINE TUNING and REF LEVEL FINE for a centered signal with seven division amplitude x Set RESOLUTION BW to 100 kHz and center signal with FINE TUNING control Adjust A23R26 and A27R26 LC equally to obtain a seven division amplitude signal y Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz 3 kHz for Option 100 and center signal with FINE TUNING control Adjust A23R31 and A27R31 XTL equally to obtain a seven division amplitude signal 5 44 o o Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d aa ab Uncouple RESOLUTION BW and FREQUENCY SPAN DIV switches Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 kHz 2 kHz for Option 100 and RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz 3 kHz for Op tion 100 Align green segment on RESOLUTION BW switch with 200
59. ed 5 47 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 21 STEP GAIN ADJUSTMENTS Cont d A24 TOP VIEW STANDARD A21 A24 A24R1 A24R2 2483 2484 2485 2486 VIDEO STEP GAIN 40dB 20dB 10dB RFGAIN OdB 12 4 ASSEMBLY AMPLIFIER A28 VARIABLE AMPLIFIER A24 OPTION 100 A24R1 2482 2483 2484 2486 2485 40dB 20dB 10dB RF GAIN 12dB OdB A 724 85 PSRS ERR Figure 5 25 Step Gain Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Install 51 1 ohm resistor between pins 23 and 24 on extender board Figure 5 24 Remove A28 Variable Gain Amplifier and install extender board in its place do not install A28 on extender board c Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 24 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green REF LEVEL EE PEU ERES RAT AIR RE eus 0 dBm REF LEVEL FINE o cannot stax tae RN EROR GU Rr ERAS ORO ERS 12 RESOLUTION BW Fr rd re ar abt Me MHz AMPLITUDE SCALE 56x CONOCER E Ra Me ORSON Ge A ea 1 dB VIDEO FILTER xxr mre qo een atq kie dra dk ea eor eae es 01 5 48 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS M M M 5 21 STEP GAIN ADJUSTMENTS Cont d d Set 10 dB step attenuator to 0 dB and 1 dB step attenuator to 12 dB Set signal generator f
60. ees RU Er ER ek Gea a pe 1 SEC VIDEO FILTER hd RR SERRE a eae EE ede l TUNING egre Maal RR RA RUE RI ecu 1 800 GHz b Connect comb generator output to spectrum analyzer INPUT as shown in Figure 4 7 Set comb generator for maximum output amplitude c Locate 1 8 GHz comb tooth and center it on CRT Reduce FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 kHz keeping signal centered on CRT with FINE TUNING control d Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place signal peak at top graticule line Carefully adjust TUNING control so upward slope of signal intersects the CENTER FREQUENCY graticule line one division down from the top as shown in Figure 4 8 NOTE With AUTO STABILIZER on the coarse TUNING control large knob can be adjusted in very small increments to fine tune the position of the signal displayed If signal disappears from display set FREQUENCY SPAN IDIV to 2 MHz and repeat steps c and d 4 19 Performance Tests Model 8565A 4 12 4 20 PERFORMANCE TESTS e RESIDUAL FM TEST Cont d Note the distance from the signal skirt at the horizontal center graticule line to the CENTER FREQUENCY graticule line at the center of the CRT In Figure 4 8 the distance is 0 2 division Div Determine the test limit by using the following formula Test Limit Div per One Horizontal Division x Specification P P A div k div x FREQ SPAN DIV Where X Test limit peak to peak i
61. least one hour instrument warm up before performing YTF Tracking Adjustment a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 51 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz 2000s eee L7 41 INPUT ATTEN Hf ete htt n 10 dB REF LEVEL i V urls ong do E caa oes 0 dBm REFLEVELFINE ee e IR h hh hh hh nnn 0 RESOLUTION Hh hh mtt 3MHz FREQUENCY SPAN n nn ZERO SPAN SWEEP TIME DIV eee IRI hh nn 20 mSEC AUTO STABILIZER seh Ihn hh nn OFF PRESELECTOR PEAK cece cece ff nn Centered in green TUNING Dada RD SEX eX Sae YO RCRUM dep Es 2 000 GHz c Set 1951 TRACK Figure 5 52 switch to TEST position d Simultaneously depress EXT and INT SWEEP SOURCE pushbuttons to obtain a dot on spectrum analyzer CRT display Adjust front panel HORIZ POSN to position dot on center vertical graticule line Set SWEEP SOURCE to INT Select 1 7 22 GHz SPAN FREQUENCY SPAN MODE and allow spectrum analyzer to sweep several times before reselecting PER DIV FREQUENCY SPAN MODE _ 5 83 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 30 YTF TRACKING ADJUSTMENT Cont d NOTE Ensure that PRESELECTOR PEAK remains in center of gre
62. maximum distortion free dynamic range can be achieved along with the maximum signal noise ratio The optimum dynamic range on the HP 8565A can be determined by referring to Figure 17 on page 11 Three types of curves are presented on the chart sensitivity solid line second order distortion dash line and third order distortion dotted line The sensitivity curves for the six internal frequency bands 0 01 22 GHz have been normalized to a 1 kHz bandwidth To use the sensitivity curves for different resolution bandwidths sim ply subtract 10 dB from the signal noise ratio reading for every factor of 10 increase in resolution bandwidth i e signal noise ratio of 70 dB for a 1 kHz bandwidth would be 60 dB for a 10 kHz bandwidth The second order and third order distortion curves are dependent on whether the 0 01 to 1 8 GHz or the 1 7 to 22 GHz frequency bands are used Two vertical axes are used in Figure 17 Signal Noise Ratio left side and Distortion Free Dynamic Range right side The optimum dynamic range occurs at the intersection of the particular sensitivity and distor tion curve under consideration At this point the maximum Distortion Free Dynamic Range is achieved with the maxi mum Signal Noise Ratio Three major factors determine the optimum achievable dynamic range of the HP 8565A They are l Effective signal input 2 Frequency band 3 Signal separation Let s examine each of these factors separately
63. negative deviations from 100 MHz reference step g p Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 0 dB REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm and FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 5 8 12 9 Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator mode switch to manual sweep and set controls to cover entire FREQUENCY BAND selected refer to note in step e Repeat steps k through l Frequency response should not exceed 2 5 dB Repeat step o Frequency response should not exceed 2 5 dB q Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 0 dB REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm and FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 8 5 18 Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator mode switch to manual sweep and set controls to cover entire FREQUENCY BAND selected refer to note in step e Repeat steps k through 1 Frequency response should not exceed 3 0 dB Repeat step o Frequency response should not exceed 3 0 dB Frequency Response 10 5 to 22 GHz Band r With INPUT ATTEN control set at 10 dB and REF LEVEL control set at 0 dBm set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 10 5 22 Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise Set BASELINE CLIPPER Fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator mode switch to manual and set controls to cover 10 5 to 18 GHz 4 43 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Cont d s Disconnect power splitter from spectrum analyzer input and measure output at power splitter w
64. not exceed 1 2 dB 100 MHz Reference dB from center horizontal graticule line h Remove 01 to 2 4 GHz RF plug in from mainframe and replace with 2 to 18 GHz RF plug in Remove 10 dB attenuator and connect power splitter directly to spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 Select band 4 2 0 18 GHz on 8620C sweep oscillator i Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 0 dB REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm and FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 1 7 4 1 Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator to CW mode and adjust CW control to center signal on CRT CENTER FREQUENCY line Set sweep oscillator to AF x 10 Set mode switch to manual sweep and set manual sweep control fully counterclockwise Adjust AF control until signal is at left hand edge of CRT display Set manual sweep control fully clockwise Signal should be at right hand edge of CRT display If nec essary readjust AF and CW controls slightly to cover entire FREQUENCY BAND 1 7 to 4 1 GHz 4 42 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS D 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Cont d j Set PRESELECTOR PEAK control to center of green region Apply a 1 kHz 1 V peak to peak sine wave from a function generator to AUX B pin 8 This signal modulates the YTF YIG tuned filter and is equivalent to peaking the PRESELECTOR PEAK at all frequencies k Disconnect power splitter from spectrum analyzer input and measure output at power splitter port with power meter Slo
65. or lab reports Also they can be reproduced easier than photographs and thus provide additional copies at minimal cost Figure 19 illus trates a typical set up used for X Y recording The bandwidth of most X Y recorders is very narrow typically 1 to 2 Hz This narrow bandwidth requires a sweep rate that is slow enough for the recorder to fully respond to a signal In general a sweep rate of 2 sec div is sufficient for the majority of X Y recorders The SINGLE or the MANUAL sweep mode on the HP 8565A can be used to control the sweep Additional detailed information on CRT Photography and X Y recording can be obtained from Hewlett Packard Application Note 150 5 X Y Recorder Blank Output Peniift Vertical Output Horizontal Sweep Output HP 8565A Signal Input Figure 19 X Y recording 6 When the STORE or SCALE button is pushed the FREQUENCY readout on the CRT bezel is fixed in its last reading This insures that the FREQUENCY read ing will not change while the camera shutter is opened 7 The SCALE button simultaneously erases the trace and illuminates the grati cule lines 13 EXTERNAL MIXER OPERATION Caubrated frequency coverage from 14 5 to 40 GHz can be achieved by using the HP 11517A External Mixer with the appropriate waveguide adapter listed in Table 3 The external mixer connects to the EXT MIXER port on the front panel of the HP 8565A with a BNC coaxial cable Setting the corr
66. output to the tuning stabilizer with the spectrum analyzer operating in zero span mode and a zero volt input from front panel FINE TUNING control A 50 MHz signal with 100 kHz frequency modulation is displayed on the spectrum analyzer and AI4R71 TICK SWEEP is ad justed for a modulation peak occuring every division FREQ SPAN DIV set to 100 kHz The spectrum analyzer is then stabilized and Al4R57 VCXO SWP is adjusted for the same sweep display as the TICK SWEEP adjustment The VCXO is then checked for linearity The VCXO ERROR OUT signal is monitored and if the variation of the signal is within limits no adjustments to the VCXO are necessary If the error signal is out of tolerance perform the adjustments in the order given Small adjustments should be made and the AUTO STABILIZER switched OFF then on after each adjustment to remove the dc com ponent introduced by the adjustment 5 70 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS Cont d SPECTRUM ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLTMETER SIGNAL GENERATOR COUNTER RF INPUT OUTPUT Figure 5 42 Tuning Stabilizer Control Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Signal Generator HP 8640B Option 001 Digital Voltmeter 4 yes Soe Pa ER e RR Rn al ae HP 3490A Oscilloscope z 2 cu rv ey x PESCE QU YE x ES HP 1740A 4 10 1 Probes Ew 10004D
67. position the peak of the signal on the REFERENCE LEVEL line of the CRT The signal amplitude is indicated by the REF LEVEL on the CRT bezel readout When the IF substitution technique is used for ampli tude measurements the only remaining measurement un certainties are due to the CAL OUTPUT signal flatness and REFERENCE LEVEL control of the analyzer Un certainties due to RESOLUTION BW INPUT ATTEN log amplifier and CRT non linearities have been elim inated because they were left unchanged throughout the measurement 5 Normally the best broadband tracking performance of the preselector is obtained with the PRESELECTOR PEAK control centered in the green area However for accurate power measurement the PRESELECTOR PEAK control should be adjusted to maximize signal level 12 Further accuracy improvement can be achieved by cali brating the analyzer at the same frequency to which the measurement will be made This would eliminate any flat ness uncertainties and the measurement accuracy would only be dependent upon the accuracy of the calibration signal and the REFERENCE LEVEL control CRT PHOTOCRAPHY AND X Y RECORDING CRT Photography The CRT bezel readout on the HP 8565A provides an excellent means of information retention with use of any compatible scope camera Since the display has readouts for all major spectrum analyzer settings the need for addi tional writing on the photograph is largely eliminated Also interfere
68. range operating Power requirements 50 60 or 400 Hz 100 120 200 or 240 volto 1095to 59 220 VA maximum Fan coo cd Model 8565A General Information Table 1 2 Model 8565A Supplemental Characteristics 1 of 4 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS NOTE user information FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS FREQUENCY SPANS 1 7 to 22 GHz When this mode is selected the analyzer displays the entire spectrum from 1 7 to 22 GHz A 3 MHz Resolution Band width 9 kHz Video Filter and 100 msec div Sweep Time are automatically selected Full Band When selected by panel pushbutton analyzer displays spec trum of Frequency Band chosen This automatically selects a 3 MHz Resolution Bandwidth and a 9 kHz Video Filter Sweep Time Div varies from approximately 10 msec to 100 msec div depending on which Frequency Band is chosen Tuning marker frequency position indicates where analyzer tuning will be centered if a Per Division span mode is chosen Per Division In position full band the entire range of the Frequency Band selected is spanned thus allowing the use of Reso lution Bandwidth and Video Filter settings other than those chosen when the Full Band push button is depressed Center frequency of the analyzer s display is set by the tuning control and indicated by the LED readouts The Fre quency CAL control to the right of the display window on the front panel is used to set the LED readout to agree with the actu
69. readjust REF LEVEL CAL or REFERENCE LEVEL FINE in steps z through as Adjust A20R1 V3 for minimum amplitude variations of upper edge of envelope on CRT trace Repeat step x Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 5 8 12 9 GHz Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 5 8 GHz to 12 9 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator and set output power level according to step w Adjust A20R14 B4A A20R15 B4B and A20R100 to set best line at the center horizontal graticule line with minimum slope Model 8565A Adjustments o ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 ec ac ad af ag ah FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 006 SCALE 4 dm 1 0 BANEN FEE 04 Bh SWEEP TIME DiV FREQUENCY Figure 5 59 Frequency Response Adjustment CRT Display Adjust A20R3 V4 for minimum amplitude variations of the upper edge of the envelope on CRT trace If amplitude variations on high frequency portion of the band are excessive gt 2 5 dB change value of factory selected resistor A20R29 and readjust A20R3 V4 Repeat step aa Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 8 5 18 GHz Set synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 8 5 GHz to 18 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator and set output power level according to step w Adjust A20R16 BSA A20R17 B5B and A20R18 BSC to set best line at center horizontal graticule line Set A20R5 fully counterclockwise and adjust A20R2 V5 for minim
70. signal generator for an unmodulated 100 MHz output at 14 dBm Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to center signal on CRT c Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz keeping signal centered with FINE TUNING control Pull to uncouple and set RESOLUTION BW to 1 MHz d Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 2 dB LOG DIV Center signal on CRT and adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place peak of signal at next to bottom graticule line e Set INPUT ATTEN to 0 dB and REF LEVEL to 0 dBm Record deviation of signal from next to bottom graticule line division error f Set signal generator to 0 dBm using power meter g Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN to 20 dB and REF LEVEL to 0 dBm Reconnect signal to INPUT 500 and adjust REF LEVEL CAL to position signal at top graticule line h Set INPUT ATTEN to 0 dB and REF LEVEL to 0 dBm Record deviation from top graticule line db division i Use error recorded in step e to correct the deviation recorded in step h Corrected deviation gain compression should not exceed 0 5 division 1 dB 4 33 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS e 4 18 INPUT ATTENUATOR ACCURACY TEST _ SPECIFICATION Input Attenuator at preselector input 70 dB range in 10 dB steps Step size variation for steps from 0 to 60 dB lt 1 0dB 01 to 18 GHz Maximum cumulative error from 0 to 60 dB lt 2 4dB 01 to 18 GHz DESCRIPTION The input attenuator accuracy is tested at 100 MHz
71. signal is the pulse desensitization factor The mainlobe power of a pulsed RF signal does not represent the actual peak power of the signal This is because a pulsed signal has its power distributed over a number of spectral components and each component represents a fraction of the peak pulse power The HP 8565A measures 18 the absolute power of each spectral component To deter mine the peak pulse power in a line spectrum a pulse desensitization factor must be added to the measured mainlobe power The desensitization factor is a function of the duty cycle and is represented by the following equa tion 20 log duty cycle For a duty cycle of 0 05 26 dB Hence the peak pulse power in Figure 33 is 22 dBm 48 dBm 26 dB An alternate method of measuring a pulsed RF signal is in the pulse spectrum mode In a pulse spectrum the indi vidual spectral lines are not resolved If the RESOLU TION BW of the analyzer is greater than 1 7 x PRF then the pulsed RF signal is being viewed in the pulse spectrum Using the pulse spectrum enables a wider reso lution bandwidth to be used Two benefits result from this first the signal noise ratio is increased because the pulse amplitude increases linearly with the resolution bandwidth BW whereas random noise increases only proportionally to the VBW Hence the signal noise ratio of the analyzer is effectively increased Secondly faster sweep times can be u
72. switch OFF remove power cord and replace 8565A top cover 5 15 Z AXIS GATE ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 30 DESCRIPTION A blanking pulse is connected to rear panel BLANKING INPUT connector A4 Z Axis Amplifier output Z Axis Gate is checked with an oscilloscope Z Axis adjustments HF ADJUST HF GAIN are set for Z Axis gate output with fastest rise time and minimum ringing 5 23 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 15 Z AXIS GATE ADJUSTMENT Cont d 10 1 PROBE OSCILLOSCOPE BLANKING INPUT Figure 5 8 Z Axis Gate Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Oscilloscope Gea weg sx Se EID EN UR ER MR eis HP 1740A P lse Generator soe sede i e au eer ee ORT UN RR HP 8002A 10 1 Divider 10004 T ee sov eoa estu M RR ES 1250 0781 5 24 Model 8565A Adjustments o ADJUSTMENTS 5 15 Z AXIS GATE ADJUSTMENT Cont d TOP VIEW 4 A4R18 4 8 HF GAIN HF ADJUST A4TP3 A4 Z AXIS 1 m Ji H c ASSEMBLY m 1 LAIT edes E Figure 5 9 Z Axis Gate Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power and remove 8565A top cover Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 8 Adjustment locations are shown in Figure 5 9 b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Sett
73. taking care not to pinch any cables and secure in place with the six flat head screws removed earlier Tighten W1 on the attenuator input Replace W2 going from the attenuator output to K2 and tighten the fasteners 10 11 12 13 Connect FL4 to the output of AT2 and tighten Place the HP 11593 502 load on the EXT mixer input Replace the side bottom and top covers Perform appropriate electrical tests Installation Note 5958 7185 Section 3 HP 70300A Tracking Generator Option 001 The following removal and installation procedure applies to HP 70300A Option 001 Keep track of where the hardware is used during the disassembly process these parts screws and bracket are reused Note The attenuator bracket allen screws and washer included in the Attenuator 1 Retrofit Kit HP part number 5062 6418 are not required in the HP 70300A 9 Option 001 Discard these parts Removal For the location of callouts in this procedure see Figure 2 1 Remove the module cover Remove the A7 VCXO Assembly and set it aside Disconnect SMA connector 1 See Figure 2 2 3 4 Loosen but do not remove SMA connectors 2 and 3 9 Remove two screws 4 to free the attenuator from the frame 6 Rotate the the center end of the attenuator outward 7 Disconnect SMA connector 3 then disconnect SMA connector 2 to free the attenuator from the module 8 Remove three bottom screws 5 then two card cage screws
74. test the electrical performance of the instrument using the specifications of Table 1 1 as the performance standards Performance tests are designed to verify each specification in Table 1 1 All tests can be performed without access to the interior of the instrument 4 3 The performance test procedures must be performed in the sequence given since some procedures rely on satisfactory test results in preceding steps If a test measurement is marginal go to Section V perform adjustment procedures If a function fails to operate go to Section VIII and perform troubleshooting NOTE To ensure that the 8565A meets specifications listed in Table 1 1 Performance Tests should be performed every six months 4 4 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 4 5 Equipment required for the performance tests is listed in the Recommended Test Equipment Table 1 3 in Section I Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications given in the table may be substituted for the recommended model 4 6 ABBREVIATED PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 4 7 The Incoming Inspection Tests of Section II are designed to test only the most critical specifications and operating features of the instrument The Incoming Inspection Tests require much less time and equipment than the complete Performance Tests in this section and are recommended for verification of overall instrument operation after repair PERFORMANCE TESTS NOTE Allow one hour warm up time for
75. to 10 dB DIV Adjust A22R2 LOG LIN to set signal level on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line i Adjust A2IR92 OFFSET for no signal level change when switching AMPLITUDE SCALE between 10 dB DIV and 1 dB DIV positions j Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB DIV and adjust front panel VERT POSN to set signal level on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line k Disconnect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal and set AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN Check that CRT trace is on bottom horizontal graticule line If not repeat steps c through g l Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 500 connector Select each AMPLITUDE SCALE 10 dB DIV 5 dB DIV 2 dB DIV 1 dB DIV and LIN and check that signal level does not shift more than 0 5 division from REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line m Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top cover 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS NOTE These adjustments are for bandwidths 3 MHz through 1 kHz For Option 100 instruments these adjustments are for bandwidths 3 MHz through 3 kHz For bandwidths 1 kHz through 100 Hz refer to Paragraph 5 33 REFERENCE Service Sheets 21 23 and 25 For Option 100 see Service Sheets 40 23 and 25 5 39 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS DESCRIPTION Three of the four crystal filters are disabled with crystal shorts The fourth crystal filter is then adjusted for a symmetrical and centered bandwidth The crystal sh
76. to 1 kHz and VIDEO FILTER to 03 Center signal on CRT display with TUNING control Adjust REF LEVEL CAL to position signal peak two divisions belov REFERENCE LEVEL line Step 8565A INPUT ATTEN from 70 to 0 dB while stepping 355D step attenuator from 0 to 70 dB maintain a total attenuation of 70 dB For each 10 dB step the signal amplitude should not change more than 1 dB from the previous step The total amplitude variation difference between max imum and minimum signal levels over entire 70 dB range should not exceed 2 4 dB M 2 15 Installation Incoming Inspection Model 8565A INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS 2 37 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST Cont d h Adjust REF LEVEL CAL to position signal peak two divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL line i Step 8565A REF LEVEL from 70 dBm to 0 dBm while stepping 355D step attenuator from 70 dB to 0 dB maintain signal level approximately two divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL line For each step the signal amplitude should be two divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL line x 0 5 divisions 20 5 dB 2 16 Model 8565A Installation Incoming Inspection Table 2 5 Incoming Inspection Test Record RESULTS b CAL OUTPUT frequency 99 99 MHz Test Description TUNING ACCURACY TEST INTERNAL MIXING 100 01 MHz d 1 8GHz 1 795 GHz 1 805 GHz 3 0GHz 2 994 GHz 3 006 GHz 4 0 GH
77. to 10 sec Div in 1 2 5 10 sequence Sweep time accuracy 10 except for 2 5 and 10 sec Div which are x 2096 Swept frequency modes use sweep times 2 msec Div through 10 sec Div When operated as a fixed tuned receiver Zero Span the full range of sweep times 2 usec to 10 sec Div may be used to display modulation waveforms GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS TEMPERATURE RANGE Operating 0 C to 55 C storage 40 to 75 C HUMIDITY RANGE Operating 95 0 C to 40 C EMI Conducted and radiated interference is within the require ments of methods CE03 and RE02 of MIL STD 461A VDE 0871 and CISPR pub n 1 2 and 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS 48 66 Hz 100 120 200 or 240 volts 10 to 5 220 VA maximum Fan cooled 1 3 General Information Model 8565A Table 1 1 Model 8565A Specifications 3 of 3 DIMENSIONS 426 mm wide 188 mm high 552 mm deep 16 3 4 in x 7 3 8 in x 21 3 4 in XJ I 5925 mm 21 75 in TS S H T 1 L F Ec EN WEIGHT 30 4 kg 60 Ibs 11517A EXTERNAL MIXER When used with the 8565A for operation in waveguide 14 5 to 40 GHz MEASUREMENT RANGE Maximum waveguide input Saturation gain compression 1 dB 15 dBm Damage Level 0 dBm or 0 1 erg Sensitivity Average noise level in a 10 kHz IF bandwidth 14 5 18 GHz lt 80 dBm 18 26 5 GHz lt 70 dBm 26 5 40 GHz lt 60 dBm Typical se
78. tooth on center graticule line using TUNING control FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 995 GHz 1 005 GHz Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control for an indication of 1 800 GHz on FREQUENCY readout Set 1 8 GHz comb tooth on center graticule line using TUNING control FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 1 795 GHz 1 805 GHz Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 1 7 4 1 Adjust TUNING control for an indication of 1 700 GHz on FREQUENCY readout pull for rapid tuning Set 1 7 GHz comb tooth on center graticule line using TUNING control FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 1 695 GHz 1 705 GHz Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control for an indication of 3 000 GHz on FREQUENCY readout Set 3 GHz comb tooth on center graticule Ifne using TUNING control FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 2 994 GHz 3 006 GHz 2 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 8 TUNING ACCURACY TEST Cont d n Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control for an indication of 4 100 GHz on FREQUENCY readout Set 4 1 GHz comb tooth on center graticule line using TUNING control FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 4 092 GHz 4 108 GHz 3 8 to 22 GHz FREQUENCY BANDS Internal Mixing o Disconnect comb generator from spectrum analyzer input Connect sweep oscillator a
79. 0 003 VIDEO FIL TER are automatically selected REFERENCE LEVEL Controls power level in dBm represented by top graticule line of CRT Adjustable in calibrated 10 dB steps with continuous calibrated 0 to 12 dB FINE vernier INPUT ATTEN Push and turn to select desired RF input attenuation indicated by blue numbers Yellow outlined numbers indicate MAXIMUM input level for lt 1 dB signal compression A reminder light indicates ZERO dB input attenuation 210 dB INPUT ATTEN provides best input match N 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 AMPLITUDE SCALE Selects log dB DIV or linear vertical scale calibration REFERENCE LEVEL re mains constant at top graticule line REF LEVEL CAL Calibrates REFERENCE LEVEL to a known amplitude reference SWEEP SOURCE Selects desired sweep source a Sweep controlled with MANUAL SWEEP knob b EXT Allows analyzer to be swept with external source c INT Analyzer sweeps repetitively with internal source Synchronization selected by SWEEP TRIG GER SWEEP TRIGGER Selects desired trigger source for INT sweep a FREE RUN Sweep triggered repetitively by in ternal source b LINE Sweep triggered by ac line frequency c VIDEO Sweep internally triggered by detected waveform of RF signal Normally used for time domain analysis in ZERO SPAN d EXT Sweep triggered by external signal e SINGLE Sweep triggered by STAR
80. 0 5 22 GHz steps i through u i Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 5 8 12 9 GHz Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 5 8 GHz to 12 9 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator according to step d graticule line If not change value of factory selected resistor A28R19 B4 GAIN Lower value j Check that lowest point of best line as defined above is within 2 dB of center horizontal o increases signal level k Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 8 5 18 GHz and synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 8 5 GHz to 18 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator according to step d l Check that lowest point of best line is within 2 dB of center horizontal graticule line If not change value of factory selected resistor A28R21 B5 GAIN lower value increases signal level NOTE If extended range sweep oscillator 8620C 86290A H08 is not available proceed to step o to check power level of the 10 5 22 GHz FRE QUENCY BAND m Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 10 5 22 GHz Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 10 5 GHz to 22 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator according to step d n Check that lowest point of best line is within 2 dB of center horizontal graticule line If not change value of factory selected resistor A28R23 B6 GAIN lower value increases signal level NOTE Steps o through u are the procedure for checking power level of the 10 5 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND with a standard 8620C 86290
81. 0 GHz with the HP 11517A mixer follows Procedure 1 Set up equipment as shown in Figure 20 2 Connect reference signal to external mixer and select corresponding EXT MIXER frequency band to be cali brated 3 Use SIG IDENT to verify that reference signal is cor rect response 4 Peak the reference signal displayed on the analyzer with the BIAS control Adjust to the maximum peak since it is normal to see more than one peak occur 5 Set the INPUT ATTEN to 0 dB and the REF LEVEL FINE control to 0 dB 6 Position the reference signal as close as possible to the REFERENCE LEVEL line using only the coarse REF ERENCE LEVEL control 7 Since the amplitude of the reference signal is known adjust the INPUT ATTEN to obtain the correct ampli tude reading on the CRT bezel readout If the reference signal is not in even 10 dB increments i e 20 dBm 30 dBm then it will be necessary to adjust the REF LEVEL FINE control to obtain the correct REF LEVEL readout 8 At this point the REF LEVEL readout on the bezel should read the amplitude of the reference signal Also the signal should be positioned within 5 dB of the REFERENCE LEVEL line The final step is to position the reference signal on the REFERENCE LEVEL line by using the REF LEVEL CAL adjustment Once the reference signal is at the REFERENCE LEV EL line and the REF LEVEL reading equals the absolute value of the reference signal the analyzer will be ampli tude
82. 0 dB Reference 20 mV None 5 49 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS eee 5 22 SWEEP GENERATOR ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheet 10 DESCRIPTION The 10V Temperature Variable Supply 10VTV is adjusted during the first five minutes of instru ment operation The sweep generator is then adjusted to start retrace when the sweep ramp reaches plus five volts Rear panel HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT is used to externally sweep an oscilloscope and a time mark generator is used to calibrate the sweep time SPECTRUM ANALYZER EXT TRIGGER TIME MARK INPUT AIGTP3 d 15 4 OSCILLOSCOPE DIGITAL VOLTMETER GENERATOR LE nem o a ess INPUT 1 Qo oe TIME MARK HORIZONTAL SWEEP QUT TRIGGER OUTPUT OUTPUT Figure 5 26 Sweep Generator Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital HP 3490A Oscilloscoop dra Nod aotem ad A we quais Pale ike Er HP 1740A Time Mark HP 226A 5 50 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS m a a E a _ _ _ 5 22 SWEEP GENERATOR ADJUSTMENTS Cont d TOP VIEW A16 A16R25 A16R9 A16R15 16819 A16R74 AST LIMIT 10 1MS 2MS SWPSTOP E i iii i MENAR GENERATOR fe
83. 0 volts 5 10 Line fuse contained in power line module Warning A 2 amp normal blow fuse must be used for 100 or 120 V operation and a 1 amp normal blow fuse must be used for 220 or 240 V operation ve ureidejp seay Zp 910213 jaued 30014 y 25314 f B SP dS ONYE 0 901 Op p 9a2 i o ama Waa GOLETA deem AGON 095 AON3OD3H xc Appendix C The Front Panel Adjustment optimizes the performance of the HP 8565A Spectrum Analyzer to obtain its specified accuracy The following step by step procedure is recom mended for adjusting the HP 8565A A condensed pro cedure is also located on a pullout INFORMATION CARD attached to the analyzer Table 4 Normal settings CRT DISPLAY WRITE BASELINE CLIPPER OFF FREQUENCY SPAN DIV MUM Push in RESOLUTION BW e to coupl FREQUENCY SPAN MODE PER DIV AMPLITUDE SCALE 10 dB DIV VIDEO FILTER OFF SWEEP SOURCE INT SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN SWEEP TIME DIV AUTO Center in PRESELECTOR PEAK green area PRE ADJUSTMENT SETTINCS Set Normal Settings on analyzer Table 1 Set FREQUENCY BAND to 0 01 1 8 GHz O Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 0 2 MHz 200 kHz Set INPUT ATTEN to 10 dB Set REFERENCE LEVEL to 10 dBm and REF LEVEL FINE to 0 dB 6 Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN 0 rR Co DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS 1 Adjust
84. 1 4 MHz The output of the third converter goes to a variable gain ampli fier selectable bandpass filters variable gain logarithmic and linear amplifiers and is then detected The detected video signal goes through a selectable video filter and a vertical amplifier to be processed for the display The IF bandpass filter log and linear amplifiers and video filter are all controllable from the front panel of the spectrum analyzer DISPLAY SECTION The sweep voltage that is used to tune the YTO is simultaneously applied to the horizontal deflection ampli fiers in the CRT The video output of the IF section is Variable Gain Amplifier Sweep Attenuator Sweep Generator SWEEP TIME DIV 9 RESOLUTION BW E FREQUENCY SPAN DIV then synchronously applied to the vertical deflection ampli fier and a plot of frequency vs amplitude results on the CRT LED s are embedded in the CRT bezel to allow easy readout of control settings and also to extend the useful ness of CRT photography The CRT bezel readout dis plays all pertinent information related to the amplitude frequency and sweep time of the analyzer Because some combinations of resolution bandwidth frequency span and video filtering require slow sweep times a variable persistence CRT is used to provide a flicker free display of the signal The CRT also has stor age capability which is useful for extended viewing or photography TUNING CONTROL SECTION
85. 1 750 GHz on FREQUENCY readout and set BASELINE CLIPPER control ulby eleekutse f Repeat step b Tune spectrum analyzer in 100 MHz increments 1 850 GHz 1 950 GHz and so on up to 4 050 GHz Check for residual responses in each position of the TUNING control by pressing START RESET pushbutton and observing CRT display ERASE CRT occasionally to prevent blooming 4 15 AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST SPECIFICATION Maximum average noise level internal mixer with 1 kHz IF bandwidth 0 dB attenuation and 003 3 Hz video filter is given in Table 4 4 p Oe 4 25 Performance Tests 4 15 FREQUENCY BAND GHz PERFORMANCE TESTS AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST Cont d Table 4 4 Average Noise Level Specification Harmonic Mode Standard dBm DESCRIPTION Maximum average noise level is checked in all internal mixer frequency bands Each frequency band is slowly swept with FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control set to F RESOLUTION BW set to 1 kHz and VIDEO FILTER set to 003 Maximum persistence is used to store all six internal mixer frequency band traces The traces are observed and average noise level for each frequency band is recorded PROCEDURE a 4 26 Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND AIHZ 4 euch re ys E XXE tex xata GAS 01 1 8 INPUT ATIEN NEG RAD SER RU ERE ERA Rd exu tat ide 0 dB REP
86. 2 1 At the instrument s rear panel power line module select the line vol tage 100V 120V 220V 240V closest to the voltage you measured in step a Line voltage must be within 5 or 1046 of the voltage setting If itis not you must use an autotrans former between the ac source and the 8565A Make sure the correct fuse is installed in the fuse holder The required fuse rating for each line voltage selection is indicated below the power line module 2 1 Installation Incoming Inspection RECEPTACLE FOR PRIMARY POWER CORD PC SELECTOR BOARD SHOWN POSITIONED FOR 115 120 VAC POWER LINE OPERATING VOLTAGE APPEARS IN MODULE WINDOW Model 8565 SELECTION OF OPERATING VOLTAGE SLIDE OPEN POWER MODULE COVER DOOR AND PUSH FUSE PULL LEVER TO LEFT TO REMOVE FUSE PULL OUT VOLTAGE SELECTOR PC BOARD POSITION PC BOARD SO THAT VOLTAGE NEAREST ACTUAL LINE VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ON TOP LEFT SIDE OF BOARD PUSH BOARD BACK INTO ITS SLOT PUSH FUSE PULL LEVER INTO ITS NORMAL RIGHT HAND POSITION CHECK FUSE TO MAKE SURE IT IS OF COR RECT RATING AND TYPE FOR INPUT AC LINE VOLTAGE FUSE RATINGS FOR DIF FERENT LINE VOLTAGES ARE INDICATED BELOW POWER MODULE INSERT CORRECT FUSE IN FUSEHOLDER Figure 2 1 Line Voltage Selection with Power Module PC Board Model 8565A 2 10 Cable Connections 2 11 Power Cable In accordance with interna tional safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power
87. 2 GHz SPAN mode SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN OIV Figure 9 Identifying a signal in FULL BAND The staircase baseline display is the result of gain com center frequency on the CRT Figure 10 The F position pensation applied to the higher frequency bands to main on the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control differs from the tain a calibrated amplitude display Gain compensation is FULL BAND pushbutton in that it allows independent ad required because the higher frequency bands utilize higher justment of RESOLUTION BW and VIDEO FILTER LO harmonics which yields reduced sensitivity Table 2 Frequency Span Modes Full Band Modes ZERO PER SPAN DIV On Freq Span Div Sinn Time Domain Close Analysis Control TUNING MARKER YES YES FREQUENCY ZERO Selectable Depends on Depends on 1 7 to 22 GHz SPAN Manual Tune from 1 kHz FREQUENCY FREQUENCY DIV to 500 BAND BAND MHz DIV Selected Selected Fixed at 3 MHz Fixed at 3 MHz RESOLUTION Selectable BANDWIDTH OPTIMUM Selectable gt lt or Selectable VIDEO FILTER Selectable Selectable Selectable Fixed at Fixed at 0 003 x 3 MHz 0 003 x 3 MHz 9kHz 9 kHz 3 To obtain the highest sensitivity from the analyzer use the lowest FREQUENCY BAND available when there is a frequency overlap For instance a 7 GHz signal can be measured in the 3 8
88. 689 8120 1692 8120 1348 8120 1398 8120 1754 8120 1378 8120 1521 8120 1676 8120 2104 Table 2 2 AC Power Cables Available Cable Plug Length Description inches Mint Gray Mint Gray Straight 90 90 90 Straight 79 90 87 i 79 79 i 80 Mint Gray Mint Gray 80 36 80 Jade Gray 80 36 Jade Gray Jade Gray Model 8565A For Use In Country Great Britian Cyprus Nigeria Rhodesia Singapore So Africa India Australia New Zealand East and West Europe Saudi Arabia United Arab Republic unpolarized in many nations United States Canada Japan 100 or 200V Mexico Phillippines Taiwan Switzerland Model 8565A rack of 482 6 mm 19 inch spacing Installa tion instructions are also given in Figure 2 2 See Table 2 3 for HP Part Numbers 2 23 Front Handles Option 907 2 24 Instruments with Option 907 contain front Handle Kit This kit supplies necessary hardware and installation instructions for mounting front handles on the instrument 2 25 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT 2 26 Environment 2 27 The instrument may be stored or ship pea in environments within the following limits Temperature 40 C to 75 C Humidity 5 to 95 at 0 to 40 C Altitude Up to 15240 metres 50000 feet The instrument should also be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensa tion within the instrument 2 28 Packaging 2 28 Origi
89. 7 5 SE 4 BN 321 4 MHz IF 2 2050 MHz IF 4 0 4 5 Figure 45 HP 8565A tuning curves 28 The HP 8565A Spectrum Analyzer reads signal levels in dBm The following equations allow conversion from dBm to dBmV or dB4V in a 50 9 system CONVERSION EQUATIONS If it is desired to convert from logarithmic units to linear units then the equations given below will be use ful Keep in mind that the logarithmic levels are all refer enced to linear units ie 0 dBm referenced to 1 mw 0 dBmV referenced to 1 mV 0 dB V referenced to 1 uV Therefore to calculate a linear level simply take the antilog of the logarithmic level Appendix E LITUDE CONVERSK sc 5 SUM qus m Figure 46 below converts from dBm to voltage in a 50 Q system Conversion from dBm to volts can be made whether the AMPLITUDE SCALE is in LOG DIV or LINear To read voltage on the HP 85654 position the signal on the REF ERENCE LEVEL line of the CRT Read the REF LEVEL in dBm and find its equivalent voltage from the Conver sion Chart 1mV Voltage rms 29 Figure 46 Conversion chart converts from dBm to voltage in 50 d Model 8565A Performance Tests SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 1 INTRODUCTION 4 2 The procedures in this section
90. 8565A Spectrum Analyzer and perform the front panel adjustments described on the pull out card located under the instrument before beginning Performance Tests 4 8 TUNING ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATION Overall tuning accuracy of the digital Frequency readout in any span mode Internal Mixing 01 to 2 5 GHz 5 MHz 20 of FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 2 5 to 22 GHz lt 0 2 20 of FREQUENCY SPAN DIV External Mixing 14 5 to 40 GHz lt 0 7 of FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 41 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 48 TUNING ACCURACY TEST Cont d CONFIGURATION A SWEEP RF SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLATOR PLUG IN FREQUENCY COUNTER MES O 00 0 INPUT RF OUTPUT INPUT 5022 10 dB COMB GENERATOR ATTENUATOR EON I Dp i CABLE ASSY TEE CABLE ASSY RG 214 U RG 214 U OUTPUT CONFIGURATION B SPECTRUM ANALYZER SWEEP OSCILLATOR RF UNIT FREQUENCY COUNTER og ano e Q o a 5 e e e Bean m ween RF OUTPUT ADAPTER N PLUG SMA JACK DIRECTIONAL COUPLER CABLE ASSY 8120 1578 ADAPTER WG TO SMA Figure 4 1 Tuning Accuracy Test Setup Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 8 TUNING ACCURACY TEST Cont d DESCRIPTION A comb generator is used to check the tuning accurac
91. 99 QO RF OUTPUT 355D OPT H80 10dB STEP ADAPTER STEP ATTENUATORS OPT H80 l 1 D e Figure 4 12 Reference Level Variation Test Setup EQUIPMENT Signal Generator HP 8640B Step Attenuator 1 HP 355C Opt H80 Step Attenuator 10 4 HP 355D Opt H80 Adapter Type N Male to BNC Female 2 required 2 0 0 0 cece cc eee eee eens HP 1250 0780 4 28 AMA ey Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 16 REFERENCELEVEL VARIATION TEST Cont d PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz eeeeeeeeee eee nnn 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN RU eda ek ERRORES ERE MONS EY 0 dB REEEBVEL ince ett eR MER ERR ues Stare am Rene rh eu 0 dBm REFEEVELFEINE x E SEP be hd Ue THER aad ian tet dre es 0 RESOLUTION BW 00 ee eee enn Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV cee eee eee eee nan 1 MHz TUNING Um Boe a kre eo aaa Wes 0 100 GHz b Set signal generator for an unmodulated 100 MHz output at approximately 0 dBm Reference Level Variation 10 dB Steps in Log Mode c Connect equipment as shown in Figure 4 12 using 10 dB step attenuator Set step attenuator at 0 dB and adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to center signal on CRT Set VIDEO
92. A are available to adapt the Model 11517A External Mixer to standard waveguide sizes 1 47 HP Model 197A Option 006 Oscilloscope Camera This camera can be used with the Model 8565A to make permanent records of your measurements Photographs include the bezel readout information 1 48 HP Model 8750 Storage Normalizer True long term storage and trace comparison make the Model 8750A a useful com pliment to the HP Model 8565A s display Prolonged use of 8565A in CONVen tional mode with 8750A Storage Normalizer is not recommended may cause changes in 8565A display storage characteristics WRITE mode 1 49 HP Model K01 8565A Transit Case This case protects the 8565A and provides a storage compartment for cables and reference booklets 1 50 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT 1 51 Equipment required for incoming inspec tion performance testing and troubleshooting of the Hewlett Packard Model 8565A is listed in Table 1 3 Other equipment may be substituted if it meets or exceeds the critical specifications listed in the table 1 11 General Information Model 8565A Figure 1 3 Service Accessories HP Part Number 08565 60100 1 of 2 1 12 Model 8565A Description Extender board 6 pin 12 conductors Extender board 15 pin 30 conductors Extender board 22 pin 44 conductors Wrench 15 64 inch open end Adapter SMA male to male Wre
93. A Spectrum Analyzer is basically an elec tronically swept superheterodyne receiver It has high sensitivity and selectivity a wide distortion free dynamic range and excellent flatness from 10 MHz to 22 GHz With external mixing frequency coverage can be extended up to 40 GHz The HP 8565A consists of an RF and IF section an automatic stabilization and control section and a display section Each of these sections will be discussed separately in this appendix A simplified block diagram Figure 44 is shown below for reference RF SECTION The RF section is composed of a 0 70 dB step attenu ator an automatic preselector a tunable local oscillator LO and a broadband mixer The step attenuator at the input to the spectrum analyzer is used to control the signal level to the mixer for optimum dynamic range and signal noise ratio The automatic preselector consists of a low pass filter from 0 01 to 1 8 GHz and a YIG tuned filter YTF from a 1 7 to 22 GHz Coaxial switches are used to switch to the proper filter depending on frequency band chosen The automatic preselector eliminates most image multiple and spurious responses of the analyzer and thus enhances its dynamic range A transistorized YIG tuned oscillator YTO with a fundamental tuning range of 2 05 to 4 46 GHz is used as the LO in this superheterodyne system The basic frequency conversion equation for a hetero dyne system is given by equation 1 1 fs fio fi
94. A sweep e oscillator If steps m and n have been successfully completed do not perform steps o through u 5 90 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d REF LEVER INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE dBm BANEN dbi e e e e e BEST LINE THRU UPPER EDGE OF ENVELOPE SSS UPPER EDGE OF ENVELOPE LOWEST POINT OF BEST LINE THROUGH UPPER ENVELOPE iul 90 SWEEP TIME DIV FREQ SPAN DIV e Figure 5 57 Best Line Relative to 1 kHz Modulation Envelope Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 10 5 22 GHz Set 8620C sweep oscillator CW MARKER pointer to 16 4 GHz and AF POINTER to 11 9 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator as follows 1 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control set to midrange 2 Adjust CW MARKER control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 3 Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control fully counterclockwise Adjust AF control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 4 Repeat steps o 1 through o 3 until no further adjustment is necessary 5 Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phase locked spectrum analyzer CRT display If the system is breaking phase lock repeat steps o 1 through o 4 p Check that lowest point of best line is within 2 dB of center horizontal graticule line If not change value of factory selected resistor A28R23 B6 GAIN lower value increases signal level q
95. A28R2 A28R19 A28R21 and A28R23 are same value as resistors on board being replaced 5 29 5 31 5 32 5 24 steps a h 5 24 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 31 5 32 5 25 5 26 5 23 step o 5 12 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS M a 5 12 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 36 DESCRIPTION The 15 volt supply is adjusted for correct output and the remaining low voltage supplies are checked for correct output SPECTRUM ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLTMETER A40A2J2 11 Figure 5 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Check and Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital Vol meter 222 oe o n rh rk re rs HP 3490A A40A2J2 Figure 5 2 A40A2 Adjustment Location 5 15 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 12 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT Cont d PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A bottom cover to gain access to low voltage power supplies Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 1 b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and connect digital voltmeter to A40A2J2 11 NOTE The 15V supply voltage to A16 Sweep Generator is a critical voltage Due to the significant voltage drop caused by the printed circuit board trace this voltage must be adjusted for 15 00V at A40A2J2 11 c Adjust 15V REF A40A2RI7 for 15 00 Vdc 20 005 Vdc at A40A2J2 11 Figure 5 2 WARNING
96. A6 Deflection Amplifiers PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 14 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 0 2c c csc cree 01 1 8 RESOLUTION BW uncoupled 20 00 eee ee eee eens 1 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN MODE ZERO SPAN INPUT ATTEN uu Ru yg e E epe eds toe m 10 dB REF LEVEL occ sti 9 RURALES Rr eem pole P a See 0 dBm REF LEVEL FINE ume e LO dre qu Phe e es 10 AMPLITUDE SCALE i deas ue AG OE BS we LIN AUTO STABILIZER evades s eee SOR SES OFF TUNING wuchs xe ONE e des ayes 0 100 GHz Horizontal Gain Adjustment c Adjust front panel VERT POSN for CRT trace two divisions above bottom horizontal graticule line d Simultaneously depress EXT and INT SWEEP SOURCE pushbuttons to obtain a dot on CRT display e Adjust front panel HORIZ POSN to set dot on center vertical graticule line f Switch SWEEP SOURCE toINT NOTE Horizontal GAIN adjustment A6R27 Figure 5 15 assumes the A16 Sweep Generator INT SWP ramp output isa 5to 5 volts ramp see Paragraph 5 22 Sweep Generator Adjustments g Adjust A6R27 GAIN for a 10 division wide CRT trace h Repeatsteps d through g until no further adjustment is necessary Vertical Gain Adju
97. ADJUSTMENTS 5 29 f 5 80 PRELIMINARY BIAS ADJUSTMENT Cont d Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 3 8 8 5 GHz Set 8620C sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 3 8 GHz to 8 5 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator according to step d Adjust A20R1 V3 over full range and note position for minimum ripple on CRT trace Set A20R1 V3 for minimum ripple Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 8 5 18 GHz Set synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to Set 8620C sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 8 5 GHz to 18 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator according to step d Adjust A20R2 V5 over full range and note position for minimum ripple on CRT trace Set A20R2 V5 for minimum ripple NOTE If extended range sweep oscillator 8620C 86290A H08 is not available proceed to step to perform preliminary bias adjustment for the 10 5 to 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 10 5 22 GHz Set 8620C 86290A H08 sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 10 5 GHz to 22 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator according to step d Adjust A20 R6 V6 over full range and note position for minimum ripple on CRT trace Set A20R6 V6 for minimum ripple NOTE Steps and m are the procedure for performing the preliminary bias adjustment for the 10 5 to 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND with a standard 8620C 86290A sweep oscillator If steps j and k have been successfully completed do not perform steps and m Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 10 5 22 GHz Set 8620C sweep oscil
98. AN DIV control to 20 kHz RESOLUTION BW 3 kHz and note 5 division spacing between modulation peaks m Check 5 division spacing between modulation peaks with FINE TUNING control set at fully counterclockwise midrange and fully clockwise positions Adjust AI4R71 VCXO SWP for best compromise of 5 division spacing over the full range of FINE TUNING control 50 MHz RES Ow ATTEN LOG SCALE CARRIER PEN D Bn 10 TE 100 kHz MODULATION PEAKS 0 050 ft 100 Het FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 5 44 Spectrum Analyzer Display with 100 kHz FM 5 73 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS Cont d Tuning Stabilizer VCXO Linearity Check and Adjustment SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLOSCOPE SIGNAL GENERATOR HORIZONTAL siccis di SWEEP OUTPUT aoo anpona ERROR OUT A36 C4 958 WIRE 1 1 PROBE Figure 5 45 Tuning Stabilizer VCXO Check and Adjustment Test Setup BOTTOM VIEW WX NOR TREES EUREN ET A38C4 a E a ERROR OUT ANE c AXA2 F d n A36A2C3 LINEARITY 2 A36A2C16 1 MHz PEAK A36A2C2 1 3 MHz NULL Figure 5 46 Tuning Stabilizer VCXO Adjustment Locations 5 74 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS Cont d dew Connect 319 gens n Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 45 and set oscilloscope for an externally swept 4 s de coupled disp
99. CRT and press START RESET pushbutton again g Observe noise level at three divisions 30 kHz and greater on each side of CW signal Noise sidebands should be greater than 70 dB below cw signal level below 50 graticule line 4 14 RESIDUAL RESPONSES TEST SPECIFICATION Residual Responses no signal present at input With 0 dB input attenuation on fundamental mixing 01 to 4 1 GHz lt 90 dBm DESCRIPTION Signals present on the display with no input to the analyzer are residual responses A reference level is selected that will allow the operator to see signals less than 90 dBm The two fundamental mixing bands 01 1 8 GHz and 1 7 4 1 GHz are slowly swept through their entire ranges in several incremental spans while observing the display Any residual responses that appear must be less than 90 dBm EQUIPMENT 4 24 500 HP 909A Opt 012 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS T _ _ _ 4 14 RESIDUAL RESPONSES TEST Cont d PROCEDURE a Connect 50 ohm termination to INPUT 50Q port and set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZz 000 e cece cere nh hn nnn 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN pidr na aean weed bia dae ear eme meque e
100. ENT N Sweep Oscillator RF Plug in HP 8620C 86290A Frequency Counter ereere cece ee eee eens HP 5340A Opt H10 Comb Genertor RE we exa Red aae prm Se ede eri HP 8406A y Function HP 3312A ur 10 dB Attenuator HP 8491B Opt 010 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 9 SPAN WIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d PROCEDURE 500 MHz and 200 MHz Per Division a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz eeeeeeee enn 5 8 12 9 INPUT ATTEN emer Ro erre uir apro PI eR ER 10 dB REF EEVEL 2 science be tian eR Sole Rte sore is qu 10 dBm de REF LEVEL FINE REESE URS 0 RESOLUTION BW coce sereis unre decd eee nnn Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV M PP ER IURE 500 MHz b Connect equipment as shown in Configuration A of Figure 4 2 Set sweep oscillator for CW output 6 0 to 12 4 GHz band and tune for a frequency counter indication of 7 000 005 GHz d Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position signal at graticule reference line far left of display Should indicate approximately 9 5 GHz on FREQUENCY readout e Tune sweep oscillator CW output for a frequency counter indication of 11 000 005 GHz f Measure error between signal peak and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 divisi
101. ENT Cont d b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND gt 01 1 8 RESOLUTION BW 5s re eao dI UP 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV vie ot 3074 3252 ee XE eh tia aon rais 2 MHz RIND UT ATTEN biter cine Sy BOW Aud dco a arto Gran Seem aba c ra dees aS 10 dB REP LEVEL inky cee eed beta qx oed ee ETE ga ees 0 dBm REP LEVEL PINE sto pack aA atia ate naan ea maa ee a exa aed 0 c Simultaneously depress INT and EXT SWEEP SOURCE pushbuttons to obtain a dot on CRT display Adjust front panel HORIZ POSN to position dot on center vertical graticule line d Depress INT SWEEP SOURCE pushbutton to obtain swept CRT trace Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 500 and adjust TUNING control to center 100 MHz signal on CRT display e Switch FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 5 MHz and adjust AISRS3 MAIN SWP OFFSET Figure 5 41 to center 100 MHz signal on CRT display f Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565 top cover 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheets 15 and 16 DESCRIPTION The 14 Tuning Stabilizer Control assembly adjustments are performed to set up the correct sweep voltages for the YTO tickler coil and Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator VCXO A14R68 FET OFF SET is adjusted to provide a zero level
102. ER BIAS for greatest peak peaking will occur in more than one position of BIAS control u Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz and identify 23 GHz signal using SIG IDENT Adjust TUNING control to position 23 GHz signal on center graticule line FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 22 84 GHz 23 16 GHz v Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 MHz and press 22 9 40 FREQUENCY BAND GHz pushbutton Adjust TUNING control for an indication of 23 00 GHz on FREQUENCY readout and repeat steps t and u 4 9 SPAN WIDTH ACCURACY TEST 40 05 SPECIFICATION zu o The frequency error for two points on the display for spans from 500 MHz div to 20 kHz div unstabilized is less than 5 of the indicated separation for stabilized spans 100 kHz div and less the error is less than 15 DESCRIPTION The 500 MHz per division and 200 MHz per division span widths are checked using a wide band source and a frequency counter The source is set to 7 GHz and the spectrum analyzer is tuned to place the signal at the far left graticule line The source is then tuned to 11 GHz and the span error for 500 MHz per division is checked at the eighth graticule line not counting the far left reference graticule line The 200 MHz per division span width accuracy is checked in the same manner The span width accuracy from 100 MHz per division down to 1 kHz per division is tested using a comb generator Wide span widths 100 MHz to 5 MHz div are checke
103. Earth terminal The WARNING sign denotes a hazard it calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the equipment Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met 1 13 Service 1 14 Although this instrument has been manufactured in accordance with international safety standards this manual contains informa tion cautions and warnings which must be followed to insure safe operation and to keep the instrument safe Service should be performed only by qualified service personnel and the following warnings should be observed Any maintenance or repair of the opened instrument under voltage should be avoided as much as possi ble and when inevitable should be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of supply General Information Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified type normal blo
104. F LEVEL FINEto0 Set synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 3 8 GHz to 8 5 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator and set output power level as follows 1 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control fully counterclockwise 2 Set sweep oscillator start marker to low frequency of selected spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND and adjust start marker for synchronizer phaselock minimum phase error 3 Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control fully clockwise and stop marker to high frequency of selected spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND Adjust stop marker for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 4 Disconnect power splitter from 8565A INPUT 502 and connect power meter to power splitter output 5 Slowly adjust sweep oscillator manual sweep control over its entire range and adjust power level for an average power meter reading of 8 dBm 6 Disconnect power meter and reconnect power splitter output to 8565A INPUT 500 7 Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phase locked spectrum analyzer CRT display If the system is breaking phase lock repeat steps w 1 through w 3 Obtain on screen display using REF LEVEL CAL Adjust A20R13 B3B for minimum slope of trace Adjust A20R12 B3A CCW so that the right side of trace drops 2 dB Readjust A20R13 B3B for minimum slope see Figure 5 59 Using REF LEVEL CAL and REFERENCE LEVEL FINE set the best line Do not
105. FILTER to 01 d Adjust signal generator output level to place peak of trace at top graticule line Set spectrum analyzer AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB LOG DIV Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 kHz Pull to uncou ple and set RESOLUTION BW to 10 kHz Center signal on CRT e Adjust signal generator output level or spectrum analyzer REF LEVEL FINE control until peak of trace is at sixth division from bottom graticule line Set the 8565A REF LEVEL control and step at tenuator to settings indicated in Table 4 6 Record deviation from the sixth division reference for each setting Table 4 6 Reference Level Variation 10 dB steps in Log Mode REF Step Deviation Step Attenuator Corrected LEVEL Attenuator from 6th Error Deviation Setting Setting Division Calibration dB dBm dB dB 0 Ref 0 Ref Attenuations gt dial settings are positive Attenuations lt dial settings are negative For example 9 99 dB calibration for a 10 dB attenuator setting represents an error of 0 01 dB Set VIDEO FILTER to 003 for maximum noise averaging Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS o 4 16 REFERENCE LEVEL VARIATION TEST Cont d f To compute the corrected deviation add the step attenuator error to the deviation from 6th division for each setting The corrected deviation should not exceed 0 5 dB or 0 5 dB from 0 to 70 dBm and should not exceed 1 0 dB or 1 0 dB from 0 to 90 dBm Ref
106. FRAGILE to assure careful handling Table 2 3 Rack Mounting Kits for 8565A 5020 8863 2510 0193 5060 9900 5020 8875 2510 0194 2 5 Installation Incoming Inspection 2 6 OPTION 908 RACK MOUNTING KIT WITHOUT FRONT HANDLES HP 5061 0078 PAN HEAD Machine Screw 8 32 x 0 375 HP 2510 0193 4 places on each side of instrument RACK FLANGE HP 5020 8863 Attach 1 on each side of instrument Model 8565A PE LEFT SIDE OF INSTRUMENT SH FRONT OF INSTRUMENT TRIM STRIP Each side of instrument Remove from instrument before attaching flange OPTION 909 RACK MOUNTING KIT WITH FRONT LEFT SIDE OF d HANDLES INSTRUMENT FLAT HEAD Is HP 5061 0084 Machine Screw SNS FRONT OF 8 32 x 0 375 TX INSTRUMENT HP 2510 0195 ji FRONT HANDLE SLE A Trim Strip lt Pax 2 5020 8897 ea RACK FLANGE eae E FRONT HANDLE ASSEMBLY of instrument ey HP 5060 9900 e PAN HEAD Machine Screw HP 28100194 __ amp THESE ITEMS SUPPLIED WITH 4 places on each REMOVE TRIM STRIPS AND side of instrument FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREWS IF HANDLES ALREADY ON INSTRUMENT OPTION 907 FRONT HANDLES KIT IF INSTRUMENT ALREADY HAS FRONT HANDLES ORDER JUST THE PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREWS 2510 0194 AND FLANGES 5020 8875 Figure 2 2 Attaching Rack Mounting Hardware and Handles Model 8565A e 2 31 2 32 Th
107. G ATTEN L0G STALE g CHECK SYMMETRY Figure 5 23 Crystal Filter Adjustment CRT Display 5 42 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS nS 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d NOTE A non metallic tuning tool is required for all crystal filter and LC filter _ adjustments f Adjust A23C54 CTR and A23C38 SYM Figure 5 22 for a centered and symmetrical bandpass Crystal center adjustment A23C54 is adjusted for minimum signal amplitude Figure 5 23 g Remove crystal short across 23 A23TP2 h Adjust A23C25 CTR and A23C15 SYM for a centered and symmetrical bandpass Crystal center adjust A23C25 is adjusted for minimum signal amplitude Figure 5 23 i Switch AMPLITUDE SCALE to 5 dB and remove crystal short across A27TP4 A27TPS j Adjust A27C54 CTR and A27C38 SYM for a centered and symmetrical bandpass Crystal center adjustment A27C54 is adjusted for minimum signal amplitude Figure 5 23 k Remove crystal short across A27TP1 A27TP2 1 Adjust A27C25 CTR and A27C15 SYM for a centered and symmetrical bandpass Crystal center adjustment A27C25 is adjusted for minimum signal amplitude Figure 5 23 LC Alignment m Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 20 kHz and AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN Adjust TUNING control to center 100 MHz signal on CRT display then set RESOLUTION BW control to 3 MHz Set A21S1 NORM TEST switch to TEST n Install A23 BW Filter No 2 Assembly on extender board a
108. Hz A26R18 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW 3 kHz Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R19 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R20 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R27 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 3 kHz A26R28 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R29 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R30 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R36 Option 100 5 11 Adjustments Model 8565A Reference Adjustment Designator Paragraph A26R37 Option 100 Table 5 2 Factory Selected Components 3 of 3 Service Performance 38 4 10 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz A26R39 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz A26R40 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLUTION BW of 1 kHz A26R45 Option 100
109. Hz f Adjust front panel TUNING control for 22 000V 0 001V at A19TP4 YTOFA g Adjust AI9R8 YTO GAIN for a frequency counter reading of 4 400 GHz 20 001 GHz h Adjust front panel TUNING control for 10 2500V 0 005V at 19 4 YTO FA and check frequency at IST LO OUTPUT Frequency should be 2 050 GHz 0 001 Ghz If not within tolerance repeat steps e through g Preliminary YTF Tracking Adjustment i Install 50 ohm load on rear panel IST LO OUTPUT connector connect 100 MHz comb generator output to front panel INPUT 50 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz eee 1 7 4 1 INPUT ATTEN uie ot xut kate e xr pat ae ee Rod aca 0 dB RESOLUTION BW 2 ee ec cee eee hh hh rrt 3 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV eee 200 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN n ree ZERO SPAN AUTO STABILIZER sese t hh nnn OFF VIDEO FILTER eee eee hh ett 3 TUNING eee ehh hh nnn nnn 2 000 GH NOTE The following procedure is a preliminary YTF tracking check and ad justment If a tracking adjustment is required also perform ad justments in Paragraph 5 30 YTF Tracking Adjustment j Set 1951 TRACK switch to TEST and ensure front panel PRESELECTOR PEAK control is set to center of green area k Adjust front panel TUNING control to peak signal on CRT display Remove hysteresis by switching to FULL BAND then back
110. Hz DIV In stabilized mode light is on and only FINE tuning should be used Pushbutton switch when depressed disables AUTO STABILIZER to allow coarse tuning in narrow spans FREQUENCY SPAN DIV Selects CRT horizontal frequency calibration in PER DIV mode Each major division on CRT total of 10 represents frequency span selected RESOLUTION BW Selects analyzer 3 dB IF band width Optimum resolution bandwidth for any fre quency span automatically selected when markers are aligned gt lt and controls pushed in to couple RES OLUTION BW can also be coupled at settings other than OPTIMUM or it can be operated independently uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN MODE Selects desired span mode a ZERO SPAN Analyzer operates as a manually tuned receiver to display detector output in time domain The SWEEP TIME DIV control is a cal ibrated time base when switched out of AUTO position b PER DIV Allows FREQUENCY SPAN DIV con trol to select desired frequency span With FRE QUENCY SPAN DIV control in F full band en tire FREQUENCY BAND selected is displayed A tuning marker selectable RESOLUTION BW and VIDEO FILTER are available in the F position c FULL BAND Spans the entire FREQUENCY BAND selected A tuning marker is available and 3 MHz RESOLUTION BW and 0 008 VIDEO FILTER are automatically selected d 1 7 22 GHz SPAN Analyzer spans 1 7 to 22 GHz in one sweep A tuning marker is available and 3 MHz RESOLUTION BW and
111. IDEO FILTER The VIDEO FILTER control is used to average the noise displayed on the CRT The VIDEO FILTER bandwidth is plied by the RESOLUTION BW setting RES Bw REF LEVEL 30 k He dh INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 1 0 eB ATTEN 1 0 ab A 18 020 Ghz SWEEP TIME OIV FREQUENCY 500 k hel FREQ SPAN DIV AUTOMATIC SWEEP TIME In the green AUTO position the sweep time is automatically adjusted for any FREQUENCY SPAN DIV RESOLU TION BW and VIDEO FILTER se lected to maintain a calibrated amplitude display One way to see the effect of AUTO SWEEP TIME DIV is by decreasing the VIDEO FILTER bandwidth The sweep rate will slow down auto matically to allow the narrow VIDEO FILTER bandwidths more time to respond Calibrated sweep times from 2 psec DIV to 10 sec DIV are available when the SWEEP TIME DIV control is switched out of the AUTO position and operated manually The faster sweep times 2 usec DIV to 1 msec DIV are used only to display fast signal equal to the dial factor indicated multi The VIDEO FILTER is useful when observing a low level signal that is close to the noise level Figure 14 illus trates how use of the VIDEO FILTER control enables a low level signal close to the noise level to be seen more clearly Tn addition a NOISE AVG position on the VIDEO FIL TER control allows the analyzer to make noise level meas urements or to measure its own sensitivity in a given RESOLUTION BW
112. IR55 3 kHz 2 5 to 3 5 kHz 1 kHz Except Option 100 A21RS2 1 kHz 0 8 to 1 2 kHz ae Adjustment complete set LINE switch OFF remove power cord and install 8565 top cover 5 46 Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS Adjustments P I a M 5 21 STEP GAIN ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheet 22 DESCRIPTION 0 dB and 12 dB adjustments are set to calibrate front panel REF LEVEL FINE control The Step Gain Amplifier is then adjusted for calibrated 10 dB steps RESISTOR LOAD CONNECTORS TO PINS 23 AND 24 EXTENDER BOARD WITH 51 10 RESISTOR IN A28 POSITION ADAPTER BLACK LEAD TO PIN 24 51 12 RESISTOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLTMETER SIGNAL GENERATOR 1dB STEP ATTENUATOR 10 dB STEP ATTENUATOR Figure 5 24 Step Gain Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT 10 dB Step Attenuator 0 cece cece eee rene eens HP 355D H80 1 dB Step Attenuator ccc cee eee nnn HP 355C H80 Digital Signal Generator hh hn nn Extender Board 2 22 08565 60107 0757 0394 0362 0227 8120 1292 Resistor 51 1 Ohm Terminal Connectors 2 eee eee een nnn Adapter BNC Female to Alligator Clips HP 3490A _
113. Installation Note Attenuator Retrofit Kit Part Number 08565 90014 CA HP Part 5958 7185 Supersedes 5958 7004 Printed in USA April 1990 SR 4 90 53 Copyright c 1990 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Attenuator Retrofit Kit LO M LEE DAYS e INSTRUMENTS AFFECTED HP 8565A Spectrum Analyzer Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2608A03234 HP 8569A Spectrum Analyzer Serial Numbers 0000A00000 9999A99999 HP 8569B Spectrum Analyzer Serial Numbers 0000A00000 99994A 99999 HP 8570A Spectrum Analyzer Serial Numbers 0000A00000 9999A 99999 HP 70300A Tracking Generator Option 001 Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2818A00542 HP 70600A Preselector Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2930A00465 e HP 70601A Preselector Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2929A00146 HP 70904A RF Section Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2924A01254 HP 70905A RF Section Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2925A00776 HP 70906A RF Section Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2928A00406 HP 70907A External Mixer Interface Serial Numbers 0000A00000 2932A00370 APPLICABLE SERVICE NOTES 8565A 23 8569A 14 8569B 12 8570A 02 70300A 07A 70601A 02A 70601A 02A 70904A 05A 70905A 05A 70906A 05A and 70907A 03A To BE PERFORMED By HP Qualified Personnel o 3 NURSES Installation Note 5958 7185 1 Purpose Certain atten
114. L control to 0 dBm Do not adjust REF LEVEL FINE control Repeat step n Set INPUT ATTEN to 30 dB and return REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm Do not adjust REF LEVEL FINE control Repeat step n Remove 10 dB attenuator and connect cable from sweep oscillator output directly to analyzer input Set REF LEVEL control to 10 dBm Adjust FINE TUNING control to peak trace and adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place trace at deviation recorded for 30 dB INPUT ATTEN setting Set INPUT ATTEN to 40 dB and return REF LEVEL control to 10 dBm Do not adjust REF LEVEL FINE control Repeat step n Set INPUT ATTEN to 50 dB and return REF LEVEL control to 10 dBm Do not adjust REF LEVEL FINE control Repeat step n Set INPUT ATTEN to 60 dB and return REF LEVEL control to 10dBm Do not adjust REF LEVEL FINE control Repeat step n Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 18 INPUT ATTENUATOR ACCURACY TEST Cont d Table 4 11 Input Attenuator Accuracy 18 GHz Deviation REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN from 6th Corrected Corrected Division Deviation Deviation dB dB dB INPUT ATTEN Setting dB 0 Ref u Record REF LEVEL corrected deviation from Table 4 6 in Table 4 11 Note that REF LEVEL o corrected deviation for INPUT ATTEN setings of 30 dB and 40 dB are the same cm Tocompute the corrected deviation subtract the REF LEVEL corrected deviation from the deviation from the 6th division for each set
115. NTS COVERED BY MANUAL 1 16 Attached to the instrument is a serial number plate Figure 1 2 The serial number is in two parts The first four digits and the letter are the serial number prefix the last five digits are the suffix The prefix is the same for all identical in struments it changes only when a change is made to the instrument The suffix however is assigned sequentially and is different for each instrument The contents of this manual apply to instruments with the serial number prefix es listed under SERIAL NUMBERS on the title page SERIAL NUMBER SUFFIX PREFIX HEWLETT PACKARD MADE IN USA Figure 1 2 Typical Serial Number Plate 1 17 An instrument manufactured after the printing of this manual may have a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the instru ment is different from those described in this man ual The manual for this newer instrument is ac companied by a yellow Manual Changes supple ment This supplement contains change informa tion that explains how to adapt the manual to the newer instrument 1 18 In addition to change information the sup plement may contain information for correcting errors in the manual To keep this manual as curent as possible Hewlett Packard recommends that you periodically request the latest Manual Changes supplement The supplement for this manual is identified with this manual s pri
116. PEL Probe vated sud cede REG a RO HP 10007D BNG lie e tes DE bea chee HP Part No 1250 0781 A14 A14TP4 A14R68 N FET OFFSET A14TP1 A14R71 A14R57 TICK S T VCXO SWP TICK SWEEP Per A14 STABILIZER CONTROL qs pe ae Eu A Figure 5 43 Tuning Stabilizer Control Adjustment Locations 5 71 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS Cont d PROCEDURE a b Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top and bottom covers Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 42 Tuning Stabilizer Control Adjustments 5 72 Set controls as follows 8565A Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND gt 01 1 8 RESOLUTION BW Coupled 10 kHz FREQ SPAN DLY ecvbesv ur IRR RN oS tor RE ere eal 100 kHz INPUT ATTEN escris PvP TE RE Si aed ee EORR ghee es 10 dB 0 dBm REELEVELFINE 21 Rex blew RS nem y Rd BS 0 FREQUENCY SPAN ZERO SPAN AUTOSTABILIZER 49 9 ed pr IR ey EST deed RR Ernie OFF Signal Generator Output Levee 13452 HO eat os Web ee Ge ee 20dBm FrequenCy 2 29 eU ROCHE etie we atem Ri iren cao 50 MHz Modulation Frequency
117. PRESSION TEST SPECIFICATION For signal levels below MAXIMUM input setting gain compression is less than 1 dB DESCRIPTION Gain compression is checked by changing the input signal from 10 dB less than the MAXIMUM input set ting to the level of the MAXIMUM input setting The signal will compress indicate less than a 10 dB change in signal level The amount of compression must be less than 1 dB 4 32 Model 8565A Performance Tests e PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 17 GAIN COMPRESSION TEST Cont d SPECTRUM ANALYZER SIGNAL GENERATOR RF OUTPUT INPUT 509 POWER SENSOR A Figure 4 13 Gain Compression Test Setup EQUIPMENT Signal Generator eA 8640 Power Meters o need aces EN NE ee dur male i da Balas HP 435A Power SENS OF uua URN BREE qwe d surda ds HP 8481A PROCEDURE O Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz oeeo 01 1 8 INPUT ATTIEN 3 esI p rie sae aise nel Re dett 20 dB 6 iiuenevc xem ver E RE Ue E ME xU 0 dBm REFELEVELEINE 9b eR ENS desee e eb cen o 0 RESOLUTION BW 002 eee eee eee Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV eee eee eee 2 MHz TUNING see pice faces beste ates Viale a VOS bs eat aa te ees 0 100 GHz b Set
118. QUENCY FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 4 3 Span Width Accuracy Measurement 500 MHz and 200 MHz per Division INPUT ATTEN 10G SCALE 10 48 EIGHTH GRATICULE LINE 0 4 DIV FOR SPANS 100 MHz TO 20 kHz PER DIV UNSTABILIZED celi FIRST GRATICULE LINE GRATICULE REFERENCE LINE 11 2 DIV FOR SPANS 100 kHz PER DIV AND LESS STABILIZED COMB SIGNALS FIRST SPECTRAL LINE NINTH SPECTRAL LINE 193 Gh L FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN OIV Figure 4 4 Span Width Accuracy Measurement 100 MHz per Division and Less n Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 50 MHz Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line from comb generator at graticule reference line first graticule line at far left of display Measure er ror between fifth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division o Set comb generator for 10 MHz comb output Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 20 MHz and RESOLUTION BW to OPTIMUM Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between seventeenth spectral line and eighth graticule line on display Error should not exceed 0 4 divison Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 9 100 4 10 SPAN WIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 MHz Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between ninth spectral line and eighth graticule
119. Rd 0 dB REFLEVEL vetb RR leant Fa Ga Bie dee BE 60 dBm REF LEVEL FINE uum C RR RR RR Ghee nx NER eed e E E 0 RESOLUTION BW isson asurin eee ehh tnn 10 kHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 0 0 ce eee ce nnn nnn 10 MHz VIDEO vp pers ADDE ad ances bee ae er dede NAR amp 1 SWEEP TRIGGER resad irasan peu a Rea e Se Oe Sie oe Rm lene SINGL TUNING bx repete ES EO 0 060 GHz PERSIST eei incu Sey ne ee ES Bae eed QA eae Fully Clockwise INTENSITY tace EA te tek eR et Sie eas 12 O clock b Press START RESET pushbutton and turn BASELINE CLIPPER control clockwise until just the peaks of the noise are displayed ERASE CRT and press START RESET again Any residual responses that appear must be less than 90 dBm below the 30 graticule line c Adjust TUNING control for an indication of 0 150 GHz FREQUENCY readout Press START RESET pushbutton and observe display d Continue tuning spectrum analyzer in 100 MHz increments 0 250 GHz 0 350 GHz and so on up to 1 750 GHz Check for residual responses in each position of the TUNING control by pressing START RESET pushbutton and observing CRT display ERASE CRT occasionally to prevent blooming e Set RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz Leave FREQUENCY SPAN DIV set to 10 MHz Set SWEEP TIME DIV to 5 SEC and press 1 7 4 1 FREQUENCY BAND GHz pushbutton Adjust TUNING control for an indication of
120. Sed Und AGIA Rae eR acd te HP 11500A PROCEDURE 01 to 4 1 GHz FREQUENCY BANDS Internal Mixing a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 0 ccc c cece cence nnn 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN aeter Sarda oust Dye 10 dB REF LEVEL onene 4 E Ix esae pn Pr Ur NES 10 dBm RBEEEBVELFEINE xy ors So UC QR ENERO Ra 0 RESOLUTION BW 5 Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 4444224599202 He Re eas S OSE CEN Ss 1 MHz b Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 50Q of spectrum analyzer and center signal on CRT with TUNING control c Adjust FREQ CAL to indicate 0 100 GHz on FREQUENCY readout tb d Connect equipment as shown in Configuration A of Figure 4 1 with comb generator connected to vum INPUT of spectrum analyzer A 4 3 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS s 4 8 TUNING ACCURACY TEST Cont d Set comb generator for 10 MHz comb output Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control for an indication of 0 010 GHz on FREQUENCY readout Set 10 MHz comb tooth on center graticule line using TUNING control FREQUENCY readout should indicate Min Actual Max 005 GHz 015 GHz Set comb generator for 100 MHz comb output Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control for an indication of 1 000 GHz on FREQUENCY readout Set 1 GHz comb
121. T LEVEL for 10 dBm Disconnect power meter 5 65 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS M 5 26 THIRD CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d f Disconnect W22 from A37J2 21 4 MHz OUT and connect test spectrum analyzer to A37J2 21 4 MHz OUT g Tune test spectrum analyzer to display 300 MHz local oscillator signal h Iteratively tune A37C5 A37C6 300 MHz BP ADJUST for maximum 300 MHz signal Third Converter cover must be installed i Disconnect test spectrum analyzer and reconnect W22 to A37J2 21 4 MHz OUT j Use TUNING control to center L O signal 0 000 GHz on CRT display k Externally sweep oscilloscope dc coupled input with spectrum analyzer HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT Adjust oscilloscope horizontal position and gain for an oscilloscope trace that just fills the 10 division graticule display Connect oscilloscope dc coupled input through a crystal detector to A37J5 BP FILTER ALIGNMENT PORT connector Set oscilloscope sensitivity to 0 002V DIV NOTE This procedure uses a negative polarity crystal detector If a positive polarity crystal detector is used the waveforms in Figure 5 39 will be inverted l Check oscilloscope display is symmetrical as shown in Figure 5 39d If not perform 321 4 MHz coarse bandpass adjustment as follows Third Converter cover must be installed 1 Loosen lock nuts on A37C2 A37C3 and A37C4 Carefully turn tuning screws clockwise u
122. T RESET pushbutton f START RESET Dual function pushbutton can start a single sweep or reset any internal sweep back to left edge of CRT g TRIGGER LEVEL Adjusts trigger level in VIDEO or EXT trigger mode DC coupled positive slope triggering In VIDEO or indicates trigger level relative to center horizontal graticule line h SWEEP Light is on while analyzer is sweeping SWEEP TIME DIV Selects time required to sweep one major horizontal division on CRT AUTO position automatically selects proper sweep time as a function of FREQUENCY SPAN DIV RESOLUTION BW and VIDEO FILTER settings to maintain a cali brated amplitude display AUTO feature is retained when FREQUENCY SPAN DIV and RESOLUTION BW are uncoupled Control is calibrated time base when switched out of AUTO Sweep times lt 1 msec DIV are used for time domain analysis ZERO SPAN only INPUT 500 Type N female connector with 500 input impedance Used for signals from 0 01 to 22 GHz CAUTION Maximum input is 4 30 dBm 1 watt and 0 volts DC See Operating Precautions EXT MIXER Input output port for use with HP 11517A External Mixer Used for measurements from 14 5 to 40 GHz in waveguide The BNC connector supplies LO signal and DC bias to external mixer and receives IF signal from mixer Terminate in 500 load when not in use CAUTION Maximum input level to HP 11517A is 0 dBm 1 mW EXT MIXER BIAS Controls amount of dc bias to HP 11517A mixer diode A
123. The NOISE AVC position engages a 1 Hz low pass filter to average the noise displayed on the CRT Also the sweep time of the analyzer is increased to facilitate making noise level measurements REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 106 SCALE e din 10 BANEN 10 dbl A 18 020 Ghz SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY 500 k hel FREQ SPAN DIV o Figure 14 a VIDEO FILTER off b VIDEO FILTER 0 003 x 0 10 kHz 30 Hz variations in the time domain ZERO SPAN A word of caution is necessary if the SWEEP TIME DIV control is operated manually in PER DIV or in any full band modes To insure that the amplitude calibration in the analyzer is maintained observe changes in signal amplitude as the SWEEP TIME DIV is changed If the signal amplitude does not change then the SWEEP TIME DIV chosen is sufficient to allow the analyzer s bandwidth filters to fully respond Additionally the SWEEP TIME DIV AUTO or manual operation will operate with any type of SWEEP TRIGGER as long as the INTernal SWEEP SOURCE is selected 4Because of detector and log amplifier characteristics 2 5 dB should be added to obtain the correct noise power reading See Hewlett Packard Appli cation Note 150 4 for details Chapter 3 OPTIMUM DYNAMIC RANGE Dynamic range is defined here as the ratio of the largest signal to the smallest signal that can be at the input simul taneously with no analyzer distortion products The opti mum dynamic range is the point where the
124. To properly identify a signal on the CRT the SIG IDENT on the HP 8565A is used To use the SIG IDENT center the unknown response on the CRT and set the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz Then depress the SIG IDENT pushbutton and note if the response resembles Figure 21 If the response moves two divisions to the left and drops in amplitude then it is the correct signal and its frequency is indicated on the LED display If the re sponse does not identify correctly then tune to another response and use the SIG IDENT once again to identify it RES BW 30 k kz REF LEVEL 30 dim INPUT ATTEN Q dBRHEN LOG SCALE 10 dbi 5 032 Giz FREQUENCY Figure 21 Signal identifier Amplitude Calibration of External Mixer The analyzer can easily be calibrated to read absolute power if a reference signal is available in the frequency range of interest This is done by using both the INPUT ATTEN control and the REF LEVEL CAL adjustment on 14 the analyzer Since the INPUT ATTEN is bypassed in EXT MIXER operation it has no effect on the signal but wil change the REF LEVEL readout Thus the INPUT ATTEN control provides a method of calibrating the analyzer to within 5 dB attenuator has 10 dB steps of the reference signal To adjust between the 5 dB limit use the REF LEVEL CAL adjustment to bring the display into an absolute power calibration A step by step proce dure for calibrating the analyzer to measure absolute power up to 4
125. UT ATTEN LOG SCALE 10 dm jj d amp RHEN EHE 7 Figure 5 40 321 4 MHz Bandpass Filter Alignment Spectrum Analyzer Display o Adjust 3 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz RESOLUTION BW switch position according to adjustment procedure in Paragraph 5 20 Bandwidth Filter Adjustment Table 5 8 p Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top and bottom covers 5 68 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 27 SWEEP ATTENUATOR ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 11 DESCRIPTION The MAIN SWP OFFSET is adjusted in the Sweep Attenuator Assembly so that a signal at center screen does not shift as FREQUENCY SPAN DIV is switched between 5 MHz and 2 MHz This adjustment is necessary because the sweep is applied to the YTO Main Coil for frequency spans z5 MHZ DIV and to the YTO Tickler Coil for frequency spans x 2 MHz DIV TOP VIEW A15 A15R53 MAIN SWP OFFSET 7 9 9 OOO A15 She JL orti ATTENUATOR off ASSEMBLY zs jel Opg Og tee peep il iti eae HE Pejo Figure 5 41 Sweep Attenuator Adjustment Location PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover pna 5 69 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 27 SWEEP ATTENUATOR ADJUSTM
126. V control is adjustable from 1 kHz DIV to 500 MHz DIV Also an F full band position is available which allows the entire FREQUENCY BAND selected to be scanned Nor mally the RESOLUTION BW is optimally coupled lt to the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV Then the optimum RES OLUTION BW is automatically selected as the FRE QUENCY SPAN DIV is adjusted Full Band The FULL BAND mode scans the entire FREQUENCY BAND selected in one sweep tuning marker 3 MHz look ke 6 20 Ge emm 1p d R SOLUTION BW and 0 003 VIDEO FILTER are auto matically set in FULL BAND Different FREQUENCY BANDS can be selected to look for unknown signals Once a signal is located in a particular FREQUENCY BAND the tuning marker can be positioned under the signal to iden tify its frequency Figure 9 Then by pushing PER DIV the signal that was at the marker will be displayed as the RES BW REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 10G SCALE 20 pg BANEN 10 eB Bc 10 SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 10 Analysis in PER DIV 1 7 22 GHz Span A multi band sweep is available when the 1 7 22 GHz SPAN pushbutton is depressed This span mode is useful iD 106 Ghz FW for observing signal activity within a broad frequency range A tuning marker can be used with rapid TUNING to quickly identify the frequency of any signal in the 1 7 to 22 GHz range Figure 11 illustrates a typical display using the 1 7 2
127. V REFERENCE AND DIGITAL READOUT ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheets 12 17 and 35 DESCRIPTION Adjustment of the A17 Frequency Control Assembly 10 reference supply is performed and offset in the center frequency output to AI2 DVM Analog Assembly is adjusted for a null The A12 DVM Analog Assembly is then adjusted to give a calibrated front panel CENTER FREQUENCY digital readout Digit intensity on the bezel readout display is adjusted for the same intensity as that of the bezel readout annunciators SPECTRUM ANALYZER 17 6 1 1 DIGITAL VOLTMETER 00099 Figure 5 29 10V Reference and Digital Readout Adjustments Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital HP 3490A e 5 54 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 23 10 V REFERENCE AND DIGITAL READOUT ADJUSTMENTS Cont d A17 A17R125 A17R11 CENTER FREQ TOP VIEW 10VR OFFSET A eti dii tih ceto ET Eide HHO A12 A17 FREQUENCY A12R18 A12R53 A12R56 CONTROL REFADJ HYST ZERO ADJ ASSEMBLY A12 DVM ANALOG ASSEMBLY A39R40 Behind Side Cover A12R37 INPUT BAL Figure 5 30 10V Reference and Digital Readout Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINEswitch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 29 and set 8565A controls as fol
128. a tunable bandpass filter that scans the frequency axis see Figure 1 At any instant in time the analyzer will only view the signal it is tuned to receive and reject all the rest In this way all the individual components of a signal are viewed separately In an oscilloscope the signals are viewed in the time domain and the amplitude displayed represents the vector sum of all signal components The purpose of this application note is to acquaint the reader with the HP 8565A Spectrum Analyzer Rather than diluting the text with extensive coverage of specific topics the reader is referred to existing application notes on that topic These appli cation notes are obtainable by contacting your local Hewlett Packard Sales Office TUNABLE FILTER PASSBAND AMPLITUDE TIME PLANE AMPLITUDE FREQUENCY PLANE THE FREQUENCY TIME DOMAINS a Three dimensional coordinates showing time frequency and amplitude The addition of a fundamental and its second harmonic is shown as an example b View seen in the t A plane On an oscilloscope only the composite f4 2f4 would be seen c View seen in the f A plane Note how the components of the composite signal are clearly seen here Figure 1 Frequency and time domain BASIC DESCRIPTION Chapter 1 OPERATING THE HP 8565A SPECTRUM ANALYZER Normal Settings Simplified Signal Chapter 2 DETAILED CONTROL OPERATION Tuning Frequency Span Modes Resolution Bandwidth Ref
129. adjustment must be performed to en sure correct second converter bandpass alignment Once the second converter bandpass filter is tuned ae to 2050 MHz adjustments are performed for compromise of best bandpass shape and minimum con version loss n a 9M 5 60 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 25 SECOND CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER OSCILLOSCOPE 99 a00 O oo A35J2 CRYSTAL DETECTOR A35J3 2nd LO 1728 6MHz A35 2nd CONVERTER ASSEMBLY A35C4 2nd LO FREQUENCY A35A1L2 2nd MIXER MATCH A35C1 A35C2 A35C3 A35J2 2nd CONV OUT Figure 5 35 Second Converter Adjustment Locations EQUIPMENT Frequency Counter 03400040 cate dee bans eee oe ee erre HP 5340A OscillOSCOpe sia 23 uu are ward See E Mea ee d RR HP 1740A Crystal Detector 6 cy LY oe dra HP 33330C Adapter BNC female to SMC female modified HP Part No 08565 60087 5 61 Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 25 SECOND CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 34 and remove 8565A bottom cover Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal S
130. al center frequency of the CRT display normally set using the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT as a 0 100 GHz frequency reference Out ot range blanking The out of range portion of the CRT trace is automatically blanked whenever the analyzer is swept beyond a band edge RESOLUTION Bandwidth Ranges See Figure 1 for curves of typical analyzer resolution using ditferent IF bandwidths IF Bandwidth shape Approximately gaussian synchronously tuned 4 pole filter Frequency drift fundamental mixing 01 4 1 GHz long term At fixed center frequency after 2 hours warm up Stabilized lt 3 0 kHz 10 minutes Unstabilized lt 25 kHz 10 minutes With Temperature Changes Stabilized lt 10 kHz C Unstabilized lt 200 kHz C Auto stabilizer may be disabled in narrow spans 100 kHz Div by depressing front panel pushbutton switch to OFF position VIDEO FILTER Video Filter bandwidths typically 20 of nominal value Values in this table are not specifications but are typical characteristics included for S Amplitude Difference dB 8 gt Frequency FIGURE 1 Typical Spectrum Analyzer Resolution INTERNAL PRESELECTOR 0 01 to 1 8 GHz Low pass filter gt 50 dB above 2 05 GHz 7 70 dB greater than 642 8 MHz from center of pass band 1 7 to 18GHz 7 60 dB from 18 to 22 GHz 1 7 to 22 GHz Tracking YIG tuned filter TRACKING PRESELECTOR Preselector skirt ro
131. and comb generator interpolation amplitude control to obtain desired presentation of comb Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 MHz Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between ninth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division kHz to 5 kHz Per Division Using procedure of step u and v change spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN DIV and function generator output frequency in accordance with Table 4 2 Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure the span error between ninth spectral line and eighth graticule line NOTE It may be necessary to temporarily disable the AUTO STABILIZER to tune the spectrum analyzer TUNING control for best comb presentation e e N 4 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS LJ 4 9 SPAN WIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d Table 4 2 Narrow Span Width Error Measurement Spectrum Analyzer Maximum Allowable Error Division Function Generator FREQ SPAN DIV RESOLUTION BW Outpt Frequency Unstabilized Stabilized 100 kHz OPTIMUM 100 kHz 50 kHz OPTIMUM 50 kHz 20 kHz OPTIMUM 20 kHz 10 kHz OPTIMUM 10 kHz 5 kHz OPTIMUM 5 kHz Check function generator output frequency using an electronic counter Frequency readout should be within 0 5 of desired audio frequency 2 kHz and 1 kHz Per Division x Set spectrum analyzer AMPLITUDE
132. arm Connectors Type N Female Input APC 7 Outputs Frequency 1 to 22 GHz Input Connector APC 3 5 Input Frequency 23 GHz K Band to R Band for use with HP 11517A Mixer Frequency 18 to 22 GHz Nominal Coupling 10 dB Attenuation to 12 dB in 1 dB steps Frequency 100 MHz Calibrated Attenuation 0 to 120 dB in 10 dB steps Frequency 100 MHz Calibrated Attenuation 10 dB 0 5 dB Frequency 01 to 18 GHz Connectors Type N Attenuation 10 dB 0 5 dB Frequency 01 to 18 GHz Connectors APC 7 Frequency dc to 18 GHz Impedance 50 Ohms Connector Type N Male BNC Female to SMC Female Waveguide to SMA Jack Recommended Model HP 86290A Opt H08 HP 86222A HP 8690B HP 8696A HP 8709A Opt H10 HP 11667A Opt 002 HP 33330C HP 11517A HP 11519A HP K752C HP 355C Opt H80 HP 355D Opt H80 HP 8491B Opt 010 HP 8492A Opt 010 HP 909A Opt 012 HP 08565 60087 Narda 4608 General Information Model 8565A Table 1 3 Recommended Test Equipment 3 of 3 o Critical Specifications Recommended Model Adapter APC 7 to Type N Male HP 11525A Adapter APC 7 to SMA Female HP 11534A Adapter APC 7 to Type N Female HP 11524A Adpater Type N Female to SMA Female HP 08690 60005 Adapter Type N Plug to SMA Jack HP 1250 1250 Adapter Type N Male to BNC Female HP 1250 0780 2 required Adapter Type N Female to BNC Male HP 1250 0077 BNC Tee Connectors BNC Jack and Plug HP 1250 0781 BNC Short I
133. ated in Figure 16 Since only one signal enters the analyzer at any instant in time the analyzer will not generate any third order distortion products Also for larger signal separation the preselector will have more rejection and hence the dynamic range is greater YIG Preselector At time t4 the YIG preselector will allow t4 to pass while rejecting fp since f5 f4 2100 MHz m N I x i E E 2 g 2 e E 2 L m e Sensitivity 2nd Order Products x sm as 3rd Order Products o o e Example It is desired to measure the third order intermodulation products of a microwave amplifier The two output signals are 10 dBm at 5 9 and 6 1 GHz What is the dynamic range of the analyzer Answer 93 dB Find the sensitivity curve for 3 8 to 8 5 GHz Intersect this with the effective signal input at 10 dBm The dynamic range of the analyzer is 93 dB 92 ws ic og E BS oa wo w 3rd Order me momode 1 10 dBm Effective Signal Input Signals greater than 0 dBm will be above the top graticule line on the CRT Distortion Free Dynamic Range dB 30 Maximum Effective Signal Input Input Signal Input Atten dBm Figure 17 Dynamic range Other constraints When measuring distortion products associated with low level signal inputs the available sig nal strength will be the limitation In thi
134. aximum positive and maximum negative corrected deviation values computed in Table 4 10 The difference between these two values total deviation should not exceed 22 4 dB dB Max Pos Corrected Deviation dB Max Neg Corrected Deviation dB Max Cumulative Error Total Deviation Disconnect step attenuator from spectrum analyzer input and connect sweep oscillator output through 10 dB attenuator as shown in Figure 4 14 Set spectrum analyzer to Normal Settings Set INPUT ATTEN to 0 dB and set REF LEVEL to 0 dBm Set FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 8 5 18 Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV coupled to 2 MHz and adjust TUNING control for an indication of 18 0 GHz on FREQUENCY readout Set sweep oscillator for a 18 0 GHz CW signal with maximum internally leveled output power Adjust sweep oscillator CW and CW vernier controls to center signal on CRT display Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB LOG DIV and adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place peak of signal at sixth division from bottom graticule line Reduce sweep oscillator power if necessary Press ZERO SPAN Pushbutton and set VIDEO FILTER to NOISE AVG Adjust FINE TUNING control to peak trace on CRT display and adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place trace at sixth division Set INPUT ATTEN to 10 dB and return REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm Do not adjust REF LEVEL FINE control Adjust FINE TUNING control to peak trace and record deviation from 6th division in Table 4 11 Set INPUT ATTEN to 20 dB and return REF LEVE
135. ble 1 1 Model 8565A Specifications 1 of 3 SPECIFICATIONS FREQUENCY SPECIFICATIONS FREQUENCY RANGE Internal mixer 0 01 to 22 GHz Covered in six ranges selectable by Frequency Band pushbuttons in GHz 01 to 1 8 1 7 to 4 1 3 8 to 8 5 5 8 to 12 9 8 5 to 18 10 5 to 22 External mixer HP 11517A 14 5 to 40 GHz Covered in two ranges selectable by Frequency Band pushbuttons in GHz 14 5 to 26 6 6 harmonic mode 22 9 to 40 10 harmonic mode Tuning Accuracy The overall tuning accuracy of the digital Frequency read out in any span mode Internal mixing 01 to 2 5 GHz lt 5 MHz 20 of Frequency Span Div 2 5 to 22 GHz lt 0 2 20 of Frequency Span Div External mixing 14 5 to 40 GHz lt 0 7 20 of Frequency Span Div Digital readout resolution included in tuning accuracy Internal mixing 1 MHz External mixing 10 MHz FREQUENCY SPANS on a 10 division CRT horizontal axis 1 7 to 22 GHz Multiband span of spectrum from 1 7 to 22 GHz in one sweep The frequency position corresponding to the tuning marker is set by the Tuning control and indicated in GHz by the digital Frequency displays on the front panel and the CRT bezel Full Band Displays spectrum of entire Frequency Band selected Tuning marker displayed in Full Band mode becomes center frequency when Per Division mode is selected Marker fre quency is given on the digital displays Per Division Eighteen calibrated spans from 1 kHz div to 500 MHz D
136. ble of causing death The adjustments in this section should be performed only by a skilled person who knows the hazard involved NOTE Before performing any adjustments allow 1 hour warmup time for the instrument 5 4 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 5 5 Table 1 3 contains a tabular list of test equipment and test accessories required in the ad justment procedures In addition the table con tains the required minimum specifications and a suggested manufacturers model number 5 6 Blade Tuning Tools 5 7 For adjustments requiring a non metallic tuning tool use fiber tuning tool HP Part Number 8710 0033 In situations not requiring non metallic tuning tools an ordinary small screwdriver or other suitable tool is sufficient No matter what tool is used never try to force any ad justment control in the analyzer This is especially critical when tuning variable slug tuned inductors and variable capacitors 5 8 FACTORY SELECTED COMPONENTS 5 9 Table 5 2 contains a list of factory selected components by reference designation schematic diagram location and basis of selection Factory selected components are designated by an asterisk on the schematic diagrams in Section VIII 5 10 RELATED ADJUSTMENTS 5 11 Interactive control adjustments are noted in the procedures Table 5 3 indicates by paragraph numbers the adjustments that must be performed if an assembly has been replaced or repaired or if an adjustment has been made on a
137. cable When connected to an appropriate power line outlet this cable grounds the instrument cabinet Table 2 2 shows the styles of mains plugs available on power cables supplied with the HP instruments The numbers for the plugs are part numbers for complete power cables WARNING If this instrument is to be energized through an autotransformer make sure the common terminal of the auto transformer is connected to the protec tive earth contact of the power source outlet socket Any interruption of the protective ground inside or outside of the 8565A can make this instrument a shock hazard 2 12 Mating Connectors 2 13 A list of connectors on the front and rear panels of the Model 8565A is given in Table 2 1 An industry identification HP part number and alternate source for the mating connector 1s given for each connector on the instrument 2 14 Operating Environment Installation Incoming Inspection 2 15 Temperature The instrument may be operated in temperatures from 0 C to 55 C 2 16 Humidity The instrument may be operated in environments with humidity from 5 to 95 at 0 to 40 C However the instrument should also be protected from temperature ex tremes which cause condensation within the instru ment 2 17 Altitude The instrument may be operated at altitudes up to 4572 metres 15000 feet 2 18 Bench Operation 2 19 The instrument cabinet has plastic feet and foldaway tilt stands for convenie
138. calibrated for that particular EXT MIXER band Note If the REF LEVEL CAL adjustment was used to calibrate the EXT MIXER band then the analyzer must be recalibrated to its internal CAL OUTPUT signal for the 0 01 to 22 GHz frequency range Additional information on external mixer measurements can be obtained from AN 150 12 Chapter 4 DISTORTION Distortion measurement is an area where the spectrum analyzer makes a significant contribution There are two basic types of distortion that are usually specified by the manufacturer harmonic distortion and two tone third order intermodulation distortion The third order inter modulation products are represented by 2f f and 2f f where f and f are the two tone input signals The HP 8565A can measure harmonic distortion prod ucts up to 100 dB down in the 1 7 to 22 GHz frequency range Third order intermodulation products can also be measured up to 100 dB down depending on signal separa tion and frequency range In all the HP 8565A is capable ti Signal Source fo Signal Source L MEASUREMENTS of making a wide variety of distortion measurements with speed and precision Amplifiers All amplifiers generate some distortion at the output and these distortion products can be significant if the amplifier is overdriven with a high level input signal The test set up in Figure 22 was used to measure the third order inter modulation products of a
139. connector Oscilloscope horizontal gain is ad justed with Channel B VOLTS DIV control h Externally sweep oscilloscope with rear panel HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUT and adjust oscilloscope horizontal gain for a ten division wide trace i Set time mark generator for 1 millisecond marker output and display output on oscilloscope Externally trigger spectrum analyzer with time marker generator j Adjust spectrum analyzer TRIGGER LEVEL to set first peak on left edge of oscilloscope graticule display Figure 5 28 Adjust Al6R15 1 MS to set eleventh peak on right edge of graticule display k Set spectrum analyzer SWEEP TIME DIV to 2 mSEC and time mark generator output to 2 milliseconds 1 Adjust spectrum analyzer TRIGGER LEVEL to set first peak on left edge of oscilloscope graticule display Adjust Al6R19 2 MS to set eleventh peak on right edge of graticule display Repeat steps i through until no further adjustment is necessary m Set spectrum analyzer SWEEP TIME DIV to AUTO and time mark generator output to 50 milliseconds n Adjust spectrum analyzer TRIGGER LEVEL to set first peak on left edge of graticule display Adjust A16R25 AST LIMIT to set sixth peak on right edge of graticule display FIRST TIME MARK ELEVENTH TIME MARK Figure 5 28 Time Mark Oscilloscope Display o Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top cover 5 53 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 28 10
140. curve that covers 0 01 to 1 8 GHz The optimum dynamic range occurs at the intersection of the curves Distortion Free Dynamic Range Effective Signal Input Frequency Bands It can be seen that the dynamic range for the 1 7 to 22 GHz frequency range is generally much greater than for the 0 01 to 1 8 GHz range This benefit is possible due to the tracking preselector in the HP 8565A The preselec tor extends the dynamic range by allowing the analyzer to measure a low level signal in the presence of a poten tially interfering high level signal Since the preselector tracks the tuning of the analyzer it only allows a signal to pass to the mixer when both preselector and analyzer are tuned to receive it When the analyzer is tuned to the low level harmonic the preselector rejects the high level fundamental thus preventing internal distortion products from affecting the measurement YIG Preselector At time ty the analyzer is tuned to receive 26 The preselector is also tuned to 2f4 and rejects f4 thereby eliminating this source of distortion Figure 15 YIG preselector tuning Signal Separation In the preselected frequency bands 1 7 to 22 GHz the tracking bandpass filter has a nominal 50 MHz band width For signal separation 72100 MHz the tracking filter will only allow one signal to pass to the mixer while simultaneously rejecting the other signal This is illustr
141. d CRT trace is a straight line 2 35 TUNING ACCURACY TEST INTERNAL MIXING SPECIFICATION 0 01 to 2 5 GHz lt 5 MHz 20 of Frequency Span Div 2 5 1022 GHz lt 0 2 20 of Frequency Span Div DESCRIPTION The tuning accuracy of the 8565A is verified in the first three FREQUENCY BAND GHz settings using a comb generator The CAL OUTPUT frequency is measured and the 8565A is calibrated at 100 MHz The comb generator is then connected to the 8565A INPUT 50Q and tuning accuracy is checked PROCEDURE a Connect frequency counter to spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT as shown in Figure 2 3 Set the controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked in green FREQUENCY BAND gt 01 1 8 TUNING y y vix eS hae ee i Rack AUTE 0 100 GHz INPUTATTEN urs onte pad per Red d a EEE aS 10 dB REFLEVEL een n eant keene E CES AE S ea 10 dBm REP LEVEL FIND ccs Gis oe tte Wie nae eR aie V SEQ 0 FREQUENCY 5 1 MHz RESOLUTION BW FRA RR E eT wags 30 kHz 2 11 Installation Incoming Inspection Model 8565A INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS 2 35 TUNING ACCURACY TEST INTERNAL MIXING Cont d b Measure the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT frequency using the frequency counter Reading should be 100 MHz 0 01 MHz c The calibration of the FREQUENCY GHz display is initially adjusted at 100 MHz Connec
142. d by using the 100 MHz 10 MHz and 1 MHz comb generator outputs Narrow span widths 2 MHz to 1 kHz div are checked by using the comb generator output modulated by a function generator Since the comb generator produces frequency com ponents separated by a precisely determined frequency interval the resultant spectral lines displayed on the CRT are evenly spaced when no span error exists in the instrument Thus span error is the cumulative variance of distance among the spectral line intervals displayed across the CRT The amount of span error is determined by comparing the distance between the first eight graticule divisions to the display distance of the corresponding spectral line intervals 4 6 Model 8565A Performance Tests Be PERFORMANCE TESTS T7 4 9 SPAN WIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d CONFIGURATION 500 MHz and 200 MHz Div SWEEP RF SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLATOR PLUG IN FREQUENCY COUNTER T 2 rr IT ae deo LE MENTI o 00 INPUT INPUT 5022 OUTPUT 10 dB ATTENUATOR TEE CONFIGURATION B 100 MHz to 1 kHz Div S t FUNCTION GENERATOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER GENERATOR FREQUENCY COUNTER e e o e s osese OUTPUT INPUT 500 MODULATION 1 MHz 10 MHz COMB BNC TEE Figure 4 2 Span Width Accuracy Test Setup INPUT 10 Hz 250 MHz EQUIPM
143. di IET PR CREE Trai fa 0 SWEEP SOURCE Veo oe ih Rr m tr cee EXT FREQUENCY SPAN MODE FULL BAND AMPLITUDE 5 dB LOG DIV PRESELECTOR Centered in green Sweep Oscillator 8620C 86290A H08 BAND tiia vto ree tu nor nee Oe Band4 MARKER SWEEP pushbutton Depress START MARKER 3 8 GHz STOP MARKER 8 5 GHz SWEEP 5 1 1 SWEEP TIME SECONDS Fully clockwis REOEEON cuesta petto ues han E ON ALC SWISS is vee bays RU EA EXT POWER EEVEL Sto vr eques vetu dai eut Midrange BLANKING OFF Rear Panel RF BLANKING DISPLAY BLANKING OFF Rear Panel DISPLAY BLANKING FM NORM PL Rear PL Set 2851 NORM OFF TEST switch Figure 5 56 to OFF Set synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to Set function generator for a 1 kHz 1 to 2 volt peak to peak sine wave output Phase lock sweep oscillator as follows 1 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator start marker to low frequency of selected spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND a
144. difference between results of steps d and e Hz 1 kHz Bw Set RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz and repeat steps c through f Hz 3 kHz BW Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz and repeat steps c through f Record measured bandwidth difference between results of steps d and e kHz 1 kHz BW Set RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz and repeat steps c through f kHz 3 kHz BW Set RESOLUTION BW to 10 kHz and repeat steps c through f kHz 10 kHz BW Connect signal generator output to spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 connector Tune signal generator to 100 MHz and set output level to approximately 0 dBm Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN to 10 dB REF LEVEL to 0 dBm RESOLUTION BW to 30 kHz and TUNING for an indication of 0 100 GHz on FREQUENCY readout disable AUTO STABILIZER while using coarse TUNING Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 11 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH SELECTIVITY TEST Cont d o Tune signal generator frequency to peak signal on CRT Adjust output level to position trace at top graticule line p Tune signal generator frequency until trace drops to two divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on 8640B MHz q Tunesignal generator frequency in opposite direction of step P until trace peaks and then drops to two divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on 8640B MHz The difference between results of steps p and is the measured ban
145. ding their signs If all of the signs are negative or all of the signs are positive subtract the lowest absolute value from the highest absolute value See Exmple 2 The sum or difference of the absolute values should not exceed 30 mV 1 5 dB Example 2 Observing the table in Example 1 note that 8 mV is the highest negative value and 3mV is the highest positive value Their absolute values being 8 mV and 3 mV 8 plus3 11 mV 1 1 dB Linear Display Accuracy k Replace 10 dB step attenuator with 1 dB step attenuator Set step attenuator to O dB l Set spectrum analyzer AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN and adjust REF LEVEL FINE control for a DVM indication of 800 mV 0 5 mV m Set step attenuator to 6 dB DVM should indicate 400 mV 10 mV 20 1 division n Set step attenuator to 12 dB DVM should indicate 200 mV 10 mV 0 1 division 4 23 SWEEP TIME ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATION Calibrated sweep times 21 internal sweep times from 2 ysec Div to 10 sec Div in 1 2 5 10 sequence Sweep time accuracy 10 except for 2 5 and 10 sec Div which are 20 DESCRIPTION A time mark generator is used to modulate a 500 MHz signal which is applied to the INPUT 500 of the spectrum analyzer ZERO SPAN is used to demodulate the signal displaying markers at very accurate time intervals The sweep time accuracy of the spectrum analyzer is checked by observing the marker displayed near the center graticule line This marker peak m
146. djust to maximize signal ampli tude INFORMATION CARD Pull out to use Card pro vides basic HP 8565A operating instructions and refer ence information CRT BEZEL READOUT Displays all major spec trum analyzer settings 23 REAR PANEL 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT X axis A 5 V to 5 V output which is proportional to horizontal CRT deflection from left to right respectively 0 0 V corresponds to center of CRT Output impedance is 5 Used for driving horizontal channel of X Y re corder or other external monitors VERTICAL OUTPUT Y axis A 0 to 0 8 V de tected video output which is proportional to vertical deflection on CRT 0 V corresponds to bottom grati cule line and 0 8 V corresponds to top graticule line Output impedance is 500 Used for driving vertical channel of X Y recorder or other external monitors Also useful in ZERO SPAN for listening to detected output with headphones BLANK OUTPUT PENLIFT Z axis A 0 or 15 V output which corresponds to CRT blanking during retrace and oversweeping of band edges During un blank period pen down output is 0 V with 100 output impedance Caution Maximum current sink 150 ma During blank pen up output is 15 V with 10 kQ output impedance Used to control pen lift of X Y recorder or blanking of other external monitor EXT SWEEP INPUT With SWEEP SOURCE in EXT a 0 to 10 V ramp will
147. dwidth at 60 dB points MHz 30 kHz BW s Set RESOLUTION BW to 100 kHz and repeat steps o through MHz 100 kHz BW t Set RESOLUTION BW to 300 kHz and repeat steps o through r MHz 300 kHz BW J u Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 MHz and repeat steps o through r MHz 1 MHz BW v Set RESOLUTION BW to 3 MHz and repeat steps o through MHz 3 MHz BW w Record the measured 3 dB bandwidths from Paragraph 4 10 steps g through k and steps r through t steps r through v for Option 100 x Record the measured 60 dB bandwidths from Paragraph 4 11 steps j through 1 steps g through 1 for Option 100 and steps r through v in Table 4 3 y Compute Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity for each RESOLUTION BW setting dividing the measured 60 dB bandwidth by the measured 3 dB bandwidth for each setting Ratios should be less than 15 1 for RESOLUTION BW settings 3 MHz to 1 kHz with standard 8565A With Option 100 instruments ratios should be less than 15 1 for RESOLUTION BW settings 3 MHz to 3 kHz and iess than 11 1 for RESOLUTION BW settings 1 kHz 3 kHz and 1 kHz 4 17 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS e 4 11 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH SELECTIVITY TEST Cont d Table 4 3 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity RESOLUTION MEASURED MEASURED Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity BW Setting 3 dB BW 60 dB BW 60 dB BW 3 dB BW Option 100 only 4 12 RESIDUAL FM TEST SPECIFICATION Total residual FM Stabil
148. e selected for a DVM reading greater than the reading set in step n If the READING CORRECTED FOR OFFSET is less than 100 mV A22R16 should be selected for a DVM reading less than the reading set in step n q Adjust front panel REF LEVEL CAL for a digital voltmeter reading of 800 mV plus offset algebraic sum 1 mV r Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB DIV and adjust A22R2 LOG LIN adjustment for a digital voltmeter reading of 800 mV plus offset s Repeat step m to recheck the Log fidelity t Set REF LEVEL control to 50 dBm and set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB DIV u Set 10 dB step attenuator to 0 dB and adjust front panel REF LEVEL CAL for a digital voltmeter reading of 700 mV do not include offset v Set REF LEVEL control to 90 dBm and set 10 dB step attenuator to 40 dB Adjust A22R1 LOG e GAIN for a digital voltmeter reading of 700 mV w Change REF LEVEL and 0 dB step attenuator settings as shown in Table 5 7 Deviation from reference should not exceed the given limits Table 5 7 Log Gain Adjustment Limits REFERENCE STEP ATTENUATOR DEVIATION FROM LEVEL SETTING REFERENCE dBm Reference 0 3 DIV 30 mV 0 3 DIV 30 mV 0 3 DIV 30 mV 0 3 DIV 30 mV x Adjustment complete Set A24S1 TEST NORM switch to NORM position Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and replace 8565A top cover e 5 36 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 19 VIDEO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 25 For
149. e I I IIR HP 8491B Option 010 5 57 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 24 YIG DRIVER ADJUSTMENT Cont d TOP VIEW A19 A19R5 A19R8 A19R14 A19R17 YTO OFFSET GAIN YTFOFFSET GAIN A19 YIG DRIVER ASSEMBLY sN TON innn 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 i 1 t A14 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ASSEMBLY Figure 5 32 YIG Driver Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord remove 8565A top cover and remove A14 Tuning Stabilizer Control Assembly b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 31 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ xsv YE E Rema aes 1 7 4 1 FREQUENCY SPAN MODE ERR CUORE Sea ZERO SPAN AUTO STABILIZER semeen teens EGG pd E da qa e A abe OFF NOTE For all digital voltmeter measurements use A19TP1 V for return YTO Adjustments c Connect frequency counter through a 10 dB attenuator to rear panel IST LO OUTPUT connector Qe Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS NENNEN ito 5 24 YIG DRIVER ADJUSTMENT Cont d d Connect digital voltmeter to AI9TP4 YTO FA and adjust front panel TUNING control for 10 2500V 0 0005V e Adjust 1985 YTO OFFSET Figure 5 32 for a frequency counter reading of 2 050 GHz 0 0002 G
150. e average noise level causing approx imately a 3 dB peak above the noise Maximum average noise level with 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth 0 dB attenuation and 0 003 3 Hz video filter is given in the table below e Band GHz Mode dBm no ems sa 3 9 wem aa 5 0 7 Reference Level Reference Level range 70 dBm to 102 dBm in 10 dB steps and continuous 0 to 12 dB calibrated vernier Reference Level accuracy With Sweep Time Division control in Auto setting the opti mum sweep rate is selected automatically for any combin ation of Frequency Span Div Resolution Bandwidth and Video Filter settings Thus the Auto Sweep setting insures a calibrated amplitude display within the following limits Calibrator output 10 dBm 0 3 dB 100 MHz 10 kHz Reference Level variation Input Attenuator at 0 dB 10 dB Steps lt 0 5 dB 0 to 70 dBm lt 1 0 dB 0 to 90 dBm Vernier 0 to 12 dB continuous Maximum error 5 dB when read from Reference Level Fine control Input Attenuator at preselector input 70 dB range in 10 dB steps Step size variation for steps from 0 to 60 dB lt 10dB 01to18GHz Maximum cumulative Error from 0 to 60 dB lt 2 4dB 01to 18 GHz Frequency Response with 0 or 10 dB of Input Attenuation Frequency response includes input attenuator preselector and mixer frequency response plus mixing mode gain var iation
151. e center of the display if necessary Now position the peak of the signal on the REFER ENCE LEVEL top graticule line of the CRT with the REFERENCE LEVEL control The REFERENCE LEVEL con Since the CAL OUTPUT signal is the calibration refer ence for the analyzer the center frequency should read 0 100 GHz and the REFERENCE LEVEL should read 10 dBm Figure 2 If not adjust the FREQ CAL and the REF LEVEL CAL to obtain the correct reading RES Bw REF LEVER ERU Ww INPUT ATTEN TU LOG SCALE 10 10 di R 10 0 SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY l FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 2 CAL OUTPUT signal For this next example let us suppose that the microwave source in the test set up Figure 3 operates in C band 4 to 8 GHz However we do not know its exact output frequency What then is the best way for locating a signal HP 8565A ocobooocon Microwave Source 4 to 8 GHz RF Output Figure 3 Microwave source test set up 2A complete Front Panel Adjustment Procedure is included in Appendix C By using the FULL BAND feature of the HP 8565A we can sweep an entire frequency band to search for a signal Since we know that the microwave source in Figure 3 oper ates in C band the 3 8 to 8 5 GHz FREQUENCY BAND would be selected A tuning marker which appears in the full band modes can be located under the signal to iden tify its f
152. ed lt 200 Hz p p in 0 1 sec 01 8 5 GHz Unstabilized 10 kHz p p in 0 1 sec 01 4 1 GHz Fundamenta mixing Stabilization range First LO automatically stabilized un less auto stabilizer is OFF for frequency spans 100 kHz div or less Noise sidebands At least 70 dB down greater than 30 kHz from center of CW signal when set to a 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth and a 10 Hz 01 Video Filter Video Filter Post detection low pass filter used to average displayed noise for a smooth trace Nominal settings are given as decimal fractions of the Resolution Bandwidth OFF 3 1 03 01 and 003 A 1 Hz NOISE AVG noise averaging setting is pro vided for noise level measurement AMPLITUDE SPECIFICATIONS AMPLITUDE RANGE Internal mixer Amplitude specifications for the HP 8565A Spectrum Analyzer with the HP 11517A External Mixer are given near the end of Table 1 1 Measurement range Damage levels Total power 30 dBm 1 watt dc OV with 0 dB Input attenuation 7V with gt 10 dB Input attenuation ac lt 502 nominal source impedance OV with O dB Input attenuation 10V peak with gt 10 dB Input attenuation Gain compression For signal levels below MAXIMUM input setting gain com pression is less than 1 dB Model 8565A General Information Table 1 1 Model 8565A Specifications 2 of 3 Average noise level Sensitivity minimum discernible signal is given by the signal level which is equal to th
153. en region throughout adjustment procedure NOTE When repeating adjustments in group A readjust YTF GAIN only at 10 5 GHz If there is insufficient range on YTF LIN adjustments in groups B and C the YTF GAIN can be compromised at 10 5 GHz to aid the YTF LIN adjustments The YTF OFFSET affects offsets on all bands YTF GAIN has an increasing affect with increasing frequency for example YTF GAIN has no affect at 2 GHz But at 4 GHz a 2 MHz shift in passband will result in a 6 MHz shift at 8 GHz an 8 MHz shift at 10 GHz and a 16 MHz shift at 18 GHz e Tracking adjustments in Table 5 10 are listed in three groups A B and C Perform adjustments according to groups and repeat adjustments in each group to give best compromise of centered passbands for that group before proceeding to the next group of adjustments Perform each tracking adjustment listed in Table 5 10 as follows 1 Select spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND and adjust TUNING control for given FREQUENCY 2 Remove error due to hysteresis by switching FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to FULL BAND then back to ZERO SPAN 3 Set sweep oscillator for a CW frequency equal to spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY Adjust sweep oscillator CW frequency for maximum signal amplitude on spectrum analyzer CRT display 4 Perform corresponding YTF tracking adjustment to center passband 10 dB points on spectrum analyzer CRT display Figure 5 53 Ensure that at least 25 o0f passband is on each side of cen
154. enerator to the external mixer port of the spectrum analyzer This IF injection method provides the high degree of stability required when measuring narrow resolution bandwidths SPECTRUM ANALYZER SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY COUNTER REAR PANEL RF OUTPUT INPUT 509 Figure 4 5 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Setup EQUIPMENT e Signal Generator ssc a sae ee ddd eke are en da eR ee as HP 8640B Erequency Counter ae Be ee eek bla te Y Stele HP 5340 10 dB HP 8491 B Opt 010 PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN nr ers Nd E 20 dB REELBVEL x exuere EI V OS 10dBm REF LEVEL FINE 360 2 Xu EIS aes iat Bo re Ee Sas be 0 RESOLUTION BW 3 MHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN ZERO SPAN AMPLITUDE SCALE e oboe Cee ee M LIN AUTOSTABIEIZER oves ee he Bits eg Se Ec S e e Re s OFF b Set signal generator for an unmodulated 100 MHz output at approximately 10 dBm Set 8640B counter mode to internal c Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to locate peak of 100 MHz signal on CRT Reduce signal generator output if necessary d Adjust signal generator output level to
155. er 1 25 OPTIONS 1 26 Option 100 1 27 The HP Model 8565A Option 100 provides RESOLUTION BW settings of 3 kHz and 1 kHz in addition to the standard 3 MHz to 1 kHz set tings These additional resolution bandwidths pro vide capability of measuring signals which are very close in frequency The Option 100 also provides greater sensitivity then the standard Model 8565A Average noise level in the 100 Hz bandwidth is typically 10 dB better than average noise level in the 1 kHz bandwidth 1 28 Option 200 1 29 The HP Model 8565A Option 200 provides calibration in dBuV Front panel controls read in dBm as in standard instrument but bezel readout displays Reference Level in dBuV Reference Level is displayed in 1 dB increments from 177 dBuV to 5 dBu V Model 8565A 1 30 Option 400 1 314 The HP Model 8565A Option 400 permits operation on 50 60 or 400 Hz mains All specifications are identical to standard Model 8565A except operating temperature range and power requirements see Table 1 1 1 32 Option 907 Front Handle Kit 1 33 Option 907 HP Part Number 5061 0090 contains front handles and necessary hardware for attaching the handles See Figure 2 2 for installa tion procedure 1 34 Option 908 Rack Flange Kit 1 35 Option 908 HP Part Number 5061 0078 contains flanges and hardware required to mount the 8565A in an equipment rack with 482 6mm 19 inches horizontal spacing See Figure 2 2 for in stallation p
156. erence Level Video Filter Automatic Sweep Time Chapter 3 SPECIAL TOPICS Optimum Dynamic Range Improving Measurement Accuracy CRT Photography and X Y Recording Teis External Mixer Operation Chapter 4 TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS Distortion Modulation Noise Electromagnetic APPENDIX A Operating Precautions B Control Glossary C Front Panel Adjustment D Theory of Operation E Amplitude Conversions PO oOo aon Qt Qt Qt 10 10 12 12 13 15 15 16 18 19 21 21 22 25 26 29 SIC DESCRIPTIC The HP 8565A is a high performance spectrum analyzer designed for ease of use Most measurements can be made with just three controls once the green Normal Set tings are preset The HP 8565A has absolute amplitude and frequency calibration from 0 01 to 22 GHz The frequency span bandwidth and video filter are all coupled with automatic sweep to maintain a calibrated display and simplify use of the analyzer Internal preselection eliminates most spurious responses to simplify signal identifica tion The preselector also extends the dynamic range of the analyzer as well as provides some protection for the input mixer All major spectrum analyzer settings are displayed on the CRT bezel readout The frequency range of the HP 8565A is 10 MHz to 22 GHz in direct coaxial input and 14 5 to 40 GHz when used with the HP 11517A External Mixer agence
157. erence Level Variation 10 dB Steps in Linear Mode g Setspectrum analyzer AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN Set REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm and set step attenuator to 0 dB h Adjust signal generator output level and spectrum analyzer REF LEVEL FINE control until peak of trace is at sixth division Set the 8565 REF LEVEL control and step attenuator to settings indicated in Table 4 7 Record deviation from sixth division reference for each setting i Using Table 4 8 convert deviation from 6th division in LIN to deviation from 6th division in dB for each setting Record dB values in Table 4 7 j To compute the corrected deviation add the step attenuator error to the deviation from 6th division in dB The corrected deviation should not exceed 0 5 dB or 0 5 dB from 0 to 70 dBm and should not exceed 1 0 dB or 1 0 dB from 0 to 90 dBm Table 4 7 Reference Level Variation 10 dB Steps Linear Mode Deviation 5 Step REF Step f Deviation rom Bth Attenuator Corrected LEVEL Attenuator Division from 6th Error Deviation Setting Setting in Li Division ud dBm dB in gd d in dB aa dB 0 Ref 0 Ref Use Table 4 8 to convert deviation in linear mode to deviation in dB Attenuations gt dial settings are positive Attenuations lt dial settings are negative 4 30 Model 8565A Performance Tests e PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 16 REFERENCELEVEL VARIATION TEST Cont d Table 4 8 Conversions from De
158. erized and compensated for when making the measurement from 18 GHz to 22 GHz CONFIGURATION A 4 EA RF FUNCTIONAL SWEEP PLUG IN RF GENERATOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLATOR 01 to 2 4 GHz PLUG IN 2 to 18 GHz wewwess A ER on LJ LJ c coo lO AUXB PINS INPUT 509 OUTPUT INPUT TEST BOWER CABLE ADAPTER SPLITTER CRYSTAL didi DETECTOR ATTENUATOR ADAPTER THERMISTOR Figure 4 16 Frequency Response Test Setup 1 of 2 4 39 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Cont d CONFIGURATION B FUNCTION GENERATOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER SWEEP OSCILLATOR RF UNIT 2 Sean o BEER o o o o e RF OUTPUT DIRECTIONAL COUPLER CRYSTAL gt DETECTOR v2 ADAPTER lt POWER SPLITTER TERMINATION CD ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER N THERMISTER NOTE MOUNT MIXER CAN BE USED AS TERMINATION ADAPTERS Figure 4 16 Frequency Response Test Setup 2 of 2 EQUIPMENT Sweep HP 8620C 86222A 86290A Sweep Oscillator RF Unit HP 8690B 8696A Power Meters dice ve esee tee cues ip de ete egg ba weeks HP 432A Thermistor Mount 0 0 0 0 AE cee s HP K486A oThermistor de d Ate ae bh ele 8478B PowerSplitte
159. ese tests are designed to meet the needs of incoming inspection The procedures test only the critical specifications of the HP Model 8565A Spectrum Analyzer Equipment required to per form the incoming inspection is listed in Table 1 3 If substitution is necessary for any of the equip INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS Installation Incoming Inspection ment the alternate models must meet or exceed the critical specifications listed in Table 1 3 2 33 The Incoming Inspection Tests require much less time and equipment than the complete Performance Tests in Section IV The Incoming Inspection Tests may also be used for verification of overall instrument operation after repair INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS NOTE Allow at least 30 minutes warmup time POWER METER SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER OUTPUT INPUT 10 Hz 250 MHz Figure 2 3 Incoming Inspection Test Setup Installation Incoming Inspection Model 8565A INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS o EQUIPMENT Frequency Counter 0 cee eee eee ee tenet es HP 5340A Comb Generator ue ak re gute ES Vea os HP 8406A Power Meteis zou eee aX ERE du HP 435A POWeESensOR 4 oet Ru Ito E e d dr HP 8481A Step Attenuator 10 4 HP 355D NOTE If substitution is necessary for any of the above listed equipment the alternate models must meet or exceed the critical specifications listed in Tab
160. esponding FREQUENCY BAND will allow frequency coverage in two ranges 14 5 to 26 6 GHz or 22 9 to 40 GHz Table 3 External mixer components HP Model Number HP Band Designation Description 11517A 11518A 11519A 11520A 12 4 40 GHz Mixer 12 4 18 GHz Adapter 18 26 5 GHz Adapter 26 5 40 GHz Adapter A connection diagram of the HP 8565A with the HP 11517A External Mixer and adapter is illustrated in Fig ure 20 T est Source HP 8565A ele E o o e RF Output HP 11517A Figure 20 External mixer test set up The EXT MIXER port is somewhat unique in that it transceives three signals The LO and a bias current Ibias exit to the HP 11517A and the IF is received back at the EXT MIXER port Filter networks at the EXT MIXER port separate the unwanted RF signals from the desired IF product The BIAS control is adjusted to opti mize the signals viewed with the external mixer In operation the HP 11517A External Mixer bypasses the input attenuator preselector and the calibrated in ternal mixer of the analyzer Hence three things must be remembered when using the external mixer l The INPUT ATTEN has no effect on input signals 2 Harmonic mixing responses must be properly identi fied since there is no preselection in the EXT MIXER bands 3 Amplitude measurements are uncalibrated unless steps are taken to calibrate the analyzer Signal Identification
161. et 8640B AM switch to PULSE Set time mark generator to 5 psec and spectrum analyzer SWEEP TIME DIV switch to 2 psec f Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL so the first peak is at the graticule reference line see Figure 4 22 The third peak should be at the center graticule line 0 5 division 10 g Set SWEEP TIME DIV to 5 psec and adjust TRIGGER LEVEL so first peak is at graticule reference line The sixth peak should be at the center grticule line 0 5 division 10 4 51 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 1 4 23 SWEEP TIME ACCURACY TEST Cont d RES Bw REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 3 Mh 10 de 1 0 BANEN 10 dBi GRATICULE REFERENCE LINE 30 5 DIVISION FIRST PEAK THIRD PEAK Figure 4 22 Sweep Time Accuracy 2u SEC DIV h Continue increasing SWEEP TIME DIV and setting time mark generator to match the sweep times of the spectrum analyzer Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL as necessary to place first peak at graticule reference line The sixth peak should be at center graticule line 0 5 division for each setting up to and including 1 SEC per division NOTE When 10 mSEC SWEEP TIMEIDIV setting is reached set BASELINE CLIPPER control clockwise until baseline completely disappears Set PERSIST control fully clockwise and adjust INTENSITY control as necessary to reduce blooming Continue checking SWEEP TIME DIV up to and including 1 SEC per division Press ERASE pushbutton before checking position of sixth peak
162. et spectrum analyer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 4 cakes eds Stet REESE 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN go ced see EROGO COURIR a Ree 10 dB REP DEVEL ss C8 EAE RED a ER EM EN ed 0 dBm KEE LEVELFINE EORR ER UE Va NERO T I GARE 0 RESOLUTION BW ha dudes iis mx EAR s Coupled pushed in EREQUENCY SPAN DIV ach wage dee E ga 2MHz TUNING ue aede ris ea Ro Etc ERU See mash a ea e RO A Reg 0 030 GHz AMPLITUDE SCALE ereas acess od qure EP eR EG STE LIN Log Display Accuracy b With no signal at INPUT measure and record the VERTICAL OUTPUT offset of the spectrum analyzer mV c Connect equipment as shown in Figure 4 20 using 10 dB step attenuator Set step attenuator to 0 dB Set signal generator for an unmodulated 30 MHz output at approximately 0 dBm 4 48 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 22 DISPLAY ACCURACY TEST Cont d d Set spectrum analyzer AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB LOG DIV and adjust TUNING control to center signal on CRT Set FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to ZERO SPAN Adjust FINE TUNING control to peak signal on CRT and DVM If there is not enough tuning range turn AUTO STABILIZER OFF while using TUNING control e Set spectrum analyzer REF LEVEL FINE for a DVM indication of 800 mV plus the offset step b 0 5 mV The trace should be approximately at the top graticule line
163. ettings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 01 1 8 RESOLUTION BW 1 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 5 MHz SWEEP SOURCE a we ignem RES EXT TUNING eX REOR a agde Ede Natt nee 0 000 GHz Connect frequency counter through modified adapter HP Part No 08565 60087 to A35J3 2ND LO Figure 5 35 and adjust A35C4 2ND LO FREQUENCY for 1728 60 MHz 0 1 MHz Disconnect frequency counter set 8565A SWEEP SOURCE to INT and use TUNING control to center L O signal 0 000 GHz on CRT display Externally sweep oscilloscope dc coupled input with spectrum analyzer HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT Adjust oscilloscope horizontal position and gain controls to provide an oscilloscope trace that just fills the 10 horizontal divisions on graticule display Disconnect W18 from A35J2 2ND CONV OUT and connect oscilloscope dc coupled input through a crystal detector to A35J2 2ND CONV OUT Set oscilloscope sensitivity to 0 01V DIV NOTE This procedure uses a negative polarity crystal detector If a positive polarity crystal detector is used the waveforms in Figure 5 36 will be inverted Check second converter bandpass display on oscilloscope CRT Figure 5 36a If center of second converter bandpass is within two divisions of being centered on oscilloscope display proceed to Second Converter Fine Bandpass Adjustment
164. ettings RESOLUTION BW Settings 3 MHz 1 MHz 300 kHz 100 kHz 30 kHz 10 kHz 3 kHz 1 kHz Opt 3 kHz 100 1 kHz 4 22 DISPLAY ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATION Display accuracy Log lt 0 1 dB dB but not more than 1 5 dB over full 70 dB display range Linear lt 0 1 division over full 8 division deflection DESCRIPTION The display accuracy is tested by connecting a DVM to the rear panel VERTICAL OUTPUT connector of the spectrum analyzer ZERO SPAN mode is selected so the signal appears as a straight horizontal line on the CRT display The DVM is used to provide good resolution for this measurement Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS e 4 22 DISPLAY ACCURACY TEST Cont d SPECTRUM ANALYZER MULTIMETER SIGNAL GENERATOR a ssaxt z 0009 aus sana n arie e INPUT 5022 RF OUTPUT ADAPTER 10 dB STEP ADAPTER STEP ATTENUATORS 1 1 dB STEP J 4 Figure 4 20 Display Accuracy Test Setup EQUIPMENT Signal Generator euo cedri ora eret area aod HP 8640B Multimeter DVM 0 00 ccc ccc cece eee Rh es HP 3490A Step Attenuator 10 4 5 HP 355D o Step Attenuator 1 4 HP 355C 1 Adapter Type N Male to BNC Female Q required wie cosw re eg REESE E REESE HP 1250 0780 PROCEDURE a S
165. f signal three divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL line Specification 5 divisions 1 0 division Verification of the 1 MHz RESOLUTION BW setting verifies proper operation of the LC bandwidth filters Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 kHz and RESOLUTION BW to 30 kHz Repeat step h and note width of signal three divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL line Specification 3 divisions 0 9 division Verification of the 30 kHz RESOLUTION BW setting verifies proper operation of the crystal XTL bandwidth filters Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 20 kHz and RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz Center signal on display and adjust REFERENCE LEVEL controls to place peak of signal 1 division 1 dB below REFERENCE LEVEL line Step RESOLUTION BW from 1 kHz to 3 MHz Note change in signal level between bandwidth set tings Specification 3 MHz to 300 kHz 0 5 dB 3 MHz to 1 kHz 1 0 dB 100 kHz BW limited to 90 RH Option 100 3 MHz to 100 Hz 1 0 dB NOTE If amplitudes in step n are within specs it can be assumed that all band widths are proper e Model 8565A Installation Incoming Inspection INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS UR A S E ERE POOR a CMT REND a i es 2 37 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATIONS Calibrator Output 10 dBm 20 3 dB Reference Level variation Input Attenuator at 0 dB 10 dB Steps lt 0 5dB 0to 70 dBm lt 1 0dB 0 to 90 dBm Vernier 0 to 12 dB continuous Maximum error lt 0 5 dB when read from Reference Level F
166. fer bias current and IF return SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS SWEEP SOURCE Manual Sweep determined by front panel control continu ously settable across CRT in either direction External Sweep determined by 0 to 10V external signal applied to External Sweep Input on rear panel Blanking is controlled by signal at Blanking Input Internal Sweep generated from internal sweep generator SWEEP TRIGGER Free Run Sweep triggered repetitively by internal source Line Sweep triggered by power line frequency Video Sweep internally triggered by detected waveform of input signal signal amplitude of 0 5 division peak to peak required on CRT display Trigger Level Functions in the Video and Ext Trigger modes to set the level of the displayed trace or Ext Trigger Input which will trigger the sweep External Trigger Sweep triggering determined by signal input between 1 and 10 volts to rear panel BNC connector Single Sweep triggered or reset by front panel Start Reset button Start reset Also can reset any internal sweep to left edge of display REAR PANEL INPUT AND OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS X Y Z Axis Outputs These rear panel outputs are com patible with and may used to drive all current HP XY recorders using positive pencoils or TTL penlift input and CRT monitors Horizontal Sweep Output X axis A voltage proportional to the horizontal sweep of the CRT trace which ranges from 5 V for the left edge to
167. for each setting See Figure 8 23 i Continue increasing SWEEP TIME DIV and time mark generator settings to measure sweep time accuracy at 2 5 and 10 second per division sweeps START RESET pushbutton can be used to reset start of trace for each setting The sixth peak should be at center graticule line 1 0 division 20 e 4 52 Model 8565A Performance Tests oe PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 23 SWEEP TIME ACCURACY TEST Cont d INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 10 Lu o GRATICULE REFERENCE LINE SIXTH PEAK FIRST PEAK 40 5 DIVISION 1 0 DIVISION FOR 2 5 and 10 SEC DIV EPI D SWEEP TIME Civ FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 4 23 Sweep Time Accuracy 1 mSEC DIV SS 4 53 4 54 Model 8565A Adjustments SECTION V ADJUSTMENTS 5 1 INTRODUCTION 5 2 This section describes adjustments required to return the Spectrum Analyzer to peak operating condition when repairs are required Table 5 1 lists all of the adjustments by adjustment name reference designator adjustment paragraph ser vice sheet number and description Included in this section are test setups and check and adjust ment procedures 5 3 Data taken during adjustments should be recorded in the spaces provided Comparison of initial data with data taken during periodic ad justments assists in preventive maintenance and troubleshooting WARNING With the covers removed terminals are ex posed that have voltages capa
168. g High Voltage Power Supply protective cover n Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and wait a minimum of 30 seconds before replacing High Voltage Power Supply protective cover Replace 8565A top and bottom covers 5 14 ORTHOGONALITY TRACE ALIGNMENT AND PATTERN ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 31 DESCRIPTION The CRT trace baseline is positioned on a horizontal graticule line and the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal display is positioned on the right vertical graticule line Adjustments are performed until both the hori zontal and vertical traces are aligned with the respective graticule lines This results in the horizontal and vertical traces being mutually perpendicular and aligned in the horizontal and vertical axes SPECTRUM ANALYZER Le cci Ore OUTPUT 502 Figure 5 6 Orthogonality Trace Alignment and Pattern Adjustment Test Setup 5 21 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 14 ORTHOGONALITY TRACE ALIGNMENT AND PATTERN ADJUSTMENT Cont d TOP VIEW A7 STORAGE MT f eR ASSEMBLY T cre pe i Figure 5 7 Orthogonality and Pattern Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ
169. gt 30 minutes minimum brightness Baseline Clipper Adjusts the vertical level below which the CRT is blanked Helps prevent blooming by blanking the bright baseline area on the CRT Eases analysis of pulsed RF and transient signals Seale Turns on internal scale illumination for photography after erasing CRT Frequency readout is frozen Scale Intensity Adjusts scale illumination 1 Maximum RF Input 30 dBm CRT BEZEL READOUT Light emitting diodes in the bezel display the following mea surement data included in CRT photographs taken with the HP 197A Option 006 Oscilloscope Camera Top Line Amplitude Scale Indicates the vertical scale factor chosen linear LIN 10 5 2 or 1 dB div Reference Level Given in 1 dB increments from 4 70 dBm to 102 dBm Input Attenuation Resolution Bandwidth Bottom line Sweep Time Div A for Auto otherwise sweep times given in sec msec or usec per division Frequency Marker frequency displayed in 1 7 22 GHz and full band modes Center frequency displayed for Per Div and Zero Span modes Freq Span Div F Hz for full band spans and 1 7 22 span or horizontal calibration in MHz or kHz per division Model 8565A 1 12 Safety Symbols A Instruction manual symbol the apparatus will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect the apparatus against damage Indicates dangerous voltages L
170. gure 5 53 YTF Passband Display 5 85 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS j 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheets 19 and 20 DESCRIPTION A synchronizer and sweep oscillator are connected to make a tracking generator for the 8565A The YTF is modulated with a 1 kHz sine wave to eliminate amplitude variations due to small errors in YTF Tracking The sweep oscillator is phase locked across each FREQUENCY BAND and frequency response adjustments are performed CONFIGURATION A Z AXIS MKR PENLIFT ERROR BLANKING SWEEP 86222A SIGNAL INPUT OSCILLATOR FM RF PLUG IN OUTPUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER 21 4 MHZ OUTPUT SWEEP INPUT SYNCHRONIZER FUNCTION GENERATOR ADAPTER RES POWER SPLITTER ADAPTER CRYSTAL 2 DETECTOR SENSOR ADAPTER Figure 5 54 Frequency Response Adjustment Test Setup Configuration A 5 86 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d CONFIGURATION B SPECTRUM ANALYZER SWEEP OSCILLATOR INPUT 5082 POWER METER RF OUTPUT CRYSTAL ADAPTER DETECTOR 2 aie I I THERMISTOR l POWER 3 STEILER ADAPTER oS es eS I ADAPTER s ADAPTER Figure 5 55 Frequency Response Adjustment Test Setup
171. h INT and EXT SWEEP SOURCE pushbuttons to produce a dot on the CRT screen 5 19 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 13 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT Cont d CAUTION Leaving a dot on the CRT for prolonged periods at high intensity will damage CRT g Adjust front panel INTENSITY HORIZ POSN and VERT POSN controls for a spot of normal intensity near center of screen h With front panel FOCUS control set to midrange adjust ASRI3 FOCUS LIMIT Figure 5 4 and front panel ASTIG A3R1 for a sharply focused round spot i Depress INT SWEEP SOURCE pushbutton to return 8565 to internal sweep Intensity Limit j Connect oscilloscope through 10 1 divider probe to A8TP see Figure 5 5 10 1 PROBE SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLOSCOPE Figure 5 5 Intensity Limit Adjustment Test Setup k Set front panel HORIZ POSN and VERT POSN controls fully counterclockwise then set front panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise l Adjust A9RI INT Figure 5 4 for an 8 volts peak to peak signal at 8 m Disconnect oscilloscope set front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise and set front panel HORIZ POSN and VERT POSN controls to midrange NT Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 13 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT Cont d After disconnecting ac line power cord allow a minimum of 30 seconds for High Voltage Power Supply to discharge before replacin
172. h in Figure 5 11 A clockwise adjustment of A1A2R11 decreases background brightness q Position photography exposure meter flush to CRT safety face plate and adjust A1A2RI11 SCALE r adjustment for an exposure value of 7 E V at an ASA of 100 Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top cover 5 29 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 17 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL GAIN ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheets 28 and 29 DESCRIPTION The CRT trace is horizontally centered then horizontal gain is adjusted for a 10 division wide trace The trace is positioned on the bottom horizontal graticule line and the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT is applied as the spectrum analyzer input REF LEVEL CAL is adjusted for an 800 millivolt output from A21 Video Assembly and the vertical gain is adjusted for eight divisions of CRT trace deflection SPECTRUM ANALYZER A21TP5 DIGITAL VOLTMETER Figure 5 14 Horizontal and Vertical Gain Adjustments Test Setup E TOP VIEW A5 A6 A5 A6 R27 GAIN A6 X DEFLECTION AMPL Ab Y DEFLECTION AMPL Figure 5 15 Horizontal and Vertical Gain Adjustment Locations 5 30 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS arm 5 17 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL GAIN ADJUSTMENTS Cont d EQUIPMENT Digital Voltmeter teon ea eee a hh hs HP 3490A WARNING To minimize shock hazard use a non metallic screwdriver for ad justments on A5 and
173. h r Min Actual Max 255 Hz Pe 345 Hz v Set spectrum analyzer RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz and repeat steps o through r Min Actual Max 85 Hz 115 2 4 11 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH SELECTIVITY TEST SPECIFICATION 60 dB 3 dB bandwidth ratio 15 1 for bandwidths 1 kHz to 3 MHz 11 1 for bandwidths 1 kHz 3 kHz and 1 kHz with Option 100 4 14 1 4 2 re Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 11 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH SELECTIVITY TEST Cont d DESCRIPTION The 60 dB bandwidth is measured for all resolution bandwidth settings 1 kHz to 3 MHz The 60 dB to 3 dB resolution bandwidth ratio shape factor is then computed by dividing the 3 dB bandwidth values obtained in the Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test into the 60 dB bandwidth values for each resolu tion bandwidth setting SPECTRUM ANALYZER SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY COUNTER REAR PANEL RF OUTPUT INPUT 5022 10 dB ATTENUATOR Figure 4 6 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Setup _ EQUIPMENT Signal Generator ccc cece eee eee hh HP 8640B Frequency Counter Le arene ls a eh ee e HP 5340A 10 dB Attenuator llle HP 8491B Opt 010 PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 1 7 4 1 INPUT ATIEN
174. iation from center horizontal graticule line should not exceed 4 5 dB RES Bw REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE RES Bw REF LEVEL NPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 3 2 Bn URSUS 2 dbi 3 MH 2 dis 0 BATEN dbj Figure 4 18 Typical Frequency Response Figure 4 19 Typical Frequency Response 10 5 to 18 GHz 18 to 22 GHz 4 45 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 21 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY SWITCHING BETWEEN BANDWIDTHS TEST SPECIFICATION Switching between bandwidths 3 MHz to 300 kHz 20 5 dB 3 MHz to 1 kHz 3 MHz to 1 kHz for Option 100 1 0 dB 100 kHz BW limited to 90 relative humidity DESCRIPTION The spectrum analyzer 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the INPUT 500 and displayed on the CRT The peak of the displayed 100 MHz signal is centered on the CRT and adjusted for a vertical deflec tion of seven divisions The amplitude variation of the 100 MHz signal is measured for each RESOLU TION BW control setting PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ oats Cae Sree eyes 01 1 8 INPUCTATTEN reu prp Ce dap Na thceve uot scene oid me RA Ee oes S ah 10 dB REP LEVEL MERPRT Duis md ERO sates 0 dBm REPLEVBLEFINE Rete e uem eique iens tenes iss 8 RESOLUTION BW x seus make cai remus Cited ale edd eade 1 MHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN DIY sas avers eee RE eR 2
175. il signal is at right hand edge of spectrum analyzer display f Set spectrum analyzer PERSIST control fully clockwise Set sweep oscillator for automatic internal sweep at slowest sweep time 100 seconds Slowly adjust sweep oscillator sweep time vernier for display similar to that of Figure 4 17 Read greatest positive and greatest negative deviations from center horizontal graticule line Frequency response deviation from center horizontal graticule line should not exceed 1 2 dB M 4 41 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Cont d NOTE If the frequency response appears to be out of specification near a band edge use a frequency counter to ensure the frequency in question is within the specified band This may be necessary as the FULL BAND mode frequency span is slightly beyond the specified band edges CENTER HORIZONTAL 1 2 dB GRATICULE LINE 1 2 dB Figure 4 17 Typical Frequency Response 01 to 1 8 GHz g Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 10 dB and set REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm Press ERASE pushbutton Record level with respect to center horizontal graticule line at 100 MHz This level is the reference for frequency response measurements with 10 dB INPUT ATTENuation Read greatest positive and negative deviations from the 100 MHz reference Frequency response should
176. ine control Input Attenuator at preselector input 70 dB range in 10 dB steps Step size variation for steps from 0 to 60 dB lt 1 0dB 01 to 18 GHz Maximum cumulative error from 0 to 60 dB lt 2 4 dB 01 to 18 GHz PROCEDURE Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked in green FREQUENCY SPAN DIV i er periere AXE CDD ERAS 1 MHz RESOEUTION BW 2 25 20 BEE Soe S EO 30 kHz coupled FREQUENCY BAND 7 01 1 8 TUNING TE Hc 0 100 GHz INPUT ATTEN sis ec rn a a Ub p EIUS Ed ardt aa m RE 10 dB REF LEVE rs WOO On ER RM Gwe ux bes en Koes 10 dBm REICEEVELR FINE 22 actes a a cavea GA qd ake ens 0 AMPLITUDE SCALE des 1 dB LOG DIV Measure CAL OUTPUT signal level with a power meter Specification 10 dBm 0 3 dB Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal through 355D step attenuator set to 0 dB to INPUT 500 and tune spectrum analyzer to center signal on CRT display Position peak of signal at REFERENCE LEVEL line with front panel REF LEVEL CAL screwdriver adjustment To verify correct operation of the REF LEVEL FINE Vernier control set 355D step attenuator to 10 dB Set REF LEVEL FINE to 9 The peak of the signal on the CRT display should be one div ision below the REFERENCE LEVEL 0 5 division lt 0 5 dB Set INPUT ATTEN to 70 dB REF LEVEL to 0 dBm REF LEVEL FINE to 8 RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV
177. ings controls marked with green SWEEP SOURCE Vah duet Ra er RENE Sr ed Ee XS EXT s nce stag od eod Ead Ea px x ec ed Cam d a Depressed c Set pulse generator for a 0 to 4 volt pulse with a 10 microsecond pulse width repeating every 100 microseconds 10 duty cycle as shown in Figure 5 10 d Set HORIZ POSN and VERT POSN controls fully counterclockwise to put trace off CRT screen e Set front panel INTENSITY control to midrange e f Connect oscilloscope Channel A to AATP3 GATE OUT Figure 5 9 g Set oscilloscope controls for a Channel A display as shown in Figure 5 11 5 25 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 15 Z AXIS GATE ADJUSTMENT Cont d MINIMUM RINGING voc y Nx 3 3 10 90 PULSE AMPLITUDE 0 VDC 3 Figure 5 10 Pulse Generator Output for a 1095 Figure 5 11 Z Axis Gate Output Oscilloscope Duty Cycle Display h Adjust A4C8 HF ADJUST and A4R18 HF GAIN Figure 5 9 for an oscilloscope display with fastest rise time and minimum ringing Figure 5 11 Check rise time between 10 and 90 of pulse amplitude Rise time should be less than or equal to 50 nanoseconds i Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and replace 8565A top cover 5 16 STORAGE DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE Service Sheet 31 DESCRIPTION The 8565A is operated in WRITE mode with INTENSITY and PERSISTence controls turned f
178. ion Amplifier X Deflection Amplifier Storage Assembly High Voltage Power Supply High Voltage Oscillator DVM Analog Tuning Stabilizer Control Assembly Sweep Attenuator Sweep Generator Frequency Control Assembly YIG Driver Bias Assembly Video Assembly Log Amplifier Bandwidth Filter No 2 Perform Adjustments on Following Related Assemblies A16 A17 A19 A17 A19 A20 A28 A21 A22 A21 A23 A27 Paragraph Number 5 23stepo 5 16 steps p q Section III Appendix C 5 15 5 17 steps a b i n 5 17 steps a h 5 14 5 16 except steps p q 5 23 steps a b g n 5 28 steps a m 5 27 5 21 5 23 a f 5 24 5 30 5 24 5 30 5 29 5 31 5 19 5 20 steps a c ac ae 5 18 Adjustments Assembly Changed or Repaired A24 Step Gain Amplifier A2S Option 100 Up Down Converter A26 Option 100 3 MHz Filter Bandwidth Filter No 1 Variable Gain Assembly First Mixer YTO Assembly YTF Ass mbly RF Attenuator Second Converter Tuning Stabilizer Third Converter Readout Driver Power Supply Table 5 3 Related Adjustments 2 of 2 Perform Adjustments on Following Related Assemblies A24 A24 A25 A24 A25 A26 A21 A23 A27 A28 A20 A28 A19 A17 A19 A20 A28 A20 A28 A35 A14 A36 A37 A39 A40 Model 8565A Paragraph Number 5 21 5 21 5 33 a b n r 5 31 Check factory selected resistors
179. ith power meter Set sweep oscillator to 18 GHz manual sweep control fully clockwise and adjust RF plug in power level control for a power meter indication of 8 dBm Reconnect power splitter to spectrum analyzer input t Set spectrum analyzer PERSIST control fully clockwise Set sweep oscillator mode switch to auto matic sweep and press spectrum analyzer ERASE pushbutton STORE display after one full plot as shown in Figure 4 18 Record the greatest positive and negative deviations from center horizontal graticule line Pos Deviation Neg Deviation u Connect equipment as shown in Configuration B of Figure 4 16 with power meter connected to measure output of power splitter Set sweep oscillator for CW output at 18 GHz Set line switch to standby and zero the power meter Turn RF on and set output of sweep oscillator to 8 dBm Slowly tune the CW source from 18 GHz to 22 GHz and note all of the peak deviations positive and negative from 8 dBm reference and frequencies at which they occur Record frequencies and peak deviations in Table 4 12 See example Table 4 12 Correcting for Frequency Response of Signal Source Frequency Peak Deviation CRT Horizontal Actual Deviation Corrected GHz dB Displacement dB Deviation div dB Example Corrected Deviation Actual Deviation dB CRT Horizontal Displacement div Peak Deviation dB Frequency GHz 4 44 Model 8565A
180. iv in a 1 2 5 10 sequence In position the entire Fre quency Band selected is spanned Span width accuracy The frequency error for any two points on the display for spans from 500 MHz to 20 kHz Div unstabilized is less than 3596 of the indicated separation for stabilized spans 100 kHz Div and less the error is less than 15 Center Frequency The center frequency represented by the CRT is indicated in GHz by the digital Frequency displays on the front panel and the CRT bezel Zero Span Analyzer becomes a manually tuned receiver for the time domain display of signal modulation set to the frequency indicated in GHz by the digital Frequency displays 1 2 SPECTRAL RESOLUTION AND STABILITY Resolution Bandwidths Resolution 3 dB Bandwidths from 1 kHz to 3 MHz in 1 3 10 sequence Bandwidth may be varied independently or coupled to Frequency Span Div control Optimum coupling best ratio of Frequency Span Div to Resolution Bandwidth is indicated by alignment of markers p gt lt q on both controls Uncoupled the controls for Frequency Span Div and Resolution Bandwidth may be independently set so any resolution band width 3 MHz to 1 kHz may be used with any span width F and 500 mHz to 1 kHz Div Resolution Bandwidth accuracy Individual resolution bandwidth 3 dB points lt 15 Selectivity 60 dB 3 dB bandwidth ratio lt 15 1 for band widths 1 kHz to 3 MHz Stability Total residual FM Stabiliz
181. ized 200 Hz P P in 0 1 sec lt 100 Hz P P in 0 1 sec for Option 100 01 to 8 5 GHz Unstabilized lt 10 kHz P P in 0 1 sec 01 to 4 1 GHz fundamental mixing DESCRIPTION A comb generator is used to supply a stable 1 8 GHz signal to the spectrum analyzer The relationship between amplitude and frequency on the linear portion of the trace is determined for a given frequency span and resolution bandwidth The residual FM is then slope detected by using the spectrum analyzer as a fixed tuned receiver ZERO SPAN Using the determined relationship between amplitude and frequency the test limits in divisions for the demodulated residual FM are determined 4 18 4 Y Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 12 RESIDUAL FM TEST Cont d COMB SPECTRUM ANALYZER GENERATOR ano INPUT 502 OUTPUT Figure 4 7 Residual FM Test Setup EQUIPMENT Comb HP 8406A PROCEDURE Stabilized a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BANDGHz eee ees 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN etre lean E AAG dB REF on aR P 30 dBm RESOLUTION BW ne conei eee nnn Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 2 eee eens 2 MHz AMPLITUDESCALE e IY EG BSS EEE TS Bie E TS LIN SWEEP TIME DIV i ex
182. justments ADJUSTMENTS M M M nd 5 16 STORAGE DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS Cont d Write Depth j Set front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise and front panel PERSIST control fully clockwise Set A7R17 WRITE DEPTH Figure 5 12 fully clockwise Press and release front panel ERASE pushbutton note that CRT screen remains bright green Adjust A7R17 WRITE DEPTH counterclockwise until CRT screen turns dark green after pressing and releasing ERASE pushbutton Then set A7R17 WRITE DEPTH approximately 10 degrees fur ther counterclockwise Intensity Persistence Adjust front panel INTENSITY and TUNING controls to display 100 MHz signal at center of CRT m screen n Set front panel PERSIST control fully clockwise and adjust front panel INTENSITY control for a trace with minimum brightness Press ERASE pushbutton as necessary when adjusting INTENSITY o Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise and adjust A7R70 INT Figure 5 12 for a trace with minimum brightness Scale Intensity p Depress front panel SCALE pushbutton and set SCALE INTEN control to midrange center of blue area NOTE If a photography exposure meter is not available use an oscilloscope camera i e HP 197A Set f stop to f16 shutter speed to 1 second and turn off flash Adjust A1A2R11 SCALE adjustment so a photograph taken with the camera has approximately the same background brightness as photograp
183. kHz Set EXT MIXER BIAS adjustment fully counterclockwise Tune signal generator to 321 4 MHz Connect signal generator output to spectrum analyzer EXT MIXER BNC connector Press 1 7 4 1 FREQUENCY BAND GHz pushbutton Connect frequency counter as shown in Figure 4 5 and set frequency counter resolution to 10 Hz Tune signal generator FINE TUNE control to peak signal on CRT Ant output level to position trace at 7 1 divisions above graticule baseline Performance Tests P Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 10 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d p Tune signal generator frequency using FINE TUNE control until trace drops to 5 divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on frequency counter MHz Tune signal generator frequency FINE TUNE in opposite direction of step p until trace peaks 7 1 divisions and then drops to 5 divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on fre quency counter MHz The difference between results of steps p and q is the measured resolution bandwidth at 3 dB points Min Actual Max 8 5 kHz Hoe Ru 11 5 kHz s Set spectrum analyzer RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz and repeat steps o through Min Actual Max 2 55 kHz GRE 3 45 kHz t Set spectrum analyzer RESOLUTION BW to 1 kHz and repeat steps o through Min Actual Max 0 85 kHz E RE E 1 15 kHz Option 100 Only u Setspectrum analyzer RESOLUTION BW to 3 kHz and repeat steps o throug
184. kHz position on FRE QUENCY SPAN DIV switch Couple the switches in this positon Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB DIV Center 100 MHz signal with FINE TUNING control and adjust REF LEVEL FINE to obtain a seven division amplitude signal Step RESOLUTION BW switch from 1 kHz 3 kHz for Option 100 to 300 kHz and check amplitude variation from seventh graticule line is less than 0 5 dB Check signal amplitude for 300 kHz and 3 MHz RESOLUTION BW positions is within 20 4 dB of seventh graticule line 1 MHz RESOLUTION BW position was used for amplitude reference in step y and should be on seventh graticule line If signal amplitude for 300 kHz positon is too low repeat steps n through u If signal amplitude for 3 MHz position is too high check Third Converter bandpass shape ac cording to Paragraph 5 26 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments ac ad Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN RESOLUTION BW to 3 MHz and FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 5 MHz Adjust REF LEVEL FINE to set signal peak 7 1 divisions above graticule baseline NOTE Adjustment of 3 dB bandwidth for 100 kHz and 30 kHz RESOLUTION BW positions requires changing factory selected resistors The 100 kHz bandwidth will narrow with an increase in resistor values The 30 kHz bandwidth will widen with an increase in resistor values While the resistor values selected for each bandwidth 100 kHz or 30 kHz do not need to be the same value they should not vary from each other by more than 10 percent NOTE
185. king at 13 GHz A19R42 YTF LIN 16 Adjusts YTF tracking at 16 GHz AI9R45 YTF LIN 18 Adjusts YTF tracking at 18 GHz 5 3 Adjustments Model 8565A Table 5 1 Adjustable Components 3 of 8 Reference Adjustment Adjustment Service Performance Deserinti Designator Name Paragraph Sheet Tests escription 19 48 YTF LIN 20 Adjusts YTF tracking at 20 GHz AI9RS1 YTF LIN 22 Adjusts tracking at 22 GHz A20R1 V3 Adjusts mixer diode bias 3 8 8 5 GHz Adjusts voltage mixer diode bias 8 5 18 GHz Adjusts mixer diode bias 0 01 4 1 GHz 5 8 12 9 GHz Adjusts output resistence for mixer diode bias 8 5 18 GHz Adjusts mixer diode bias 10 5 22 GHz Frequency response compensation lower part of 01 1 8 GHz band e Frequency response compensation upper part of 01 1 8 GHz band Frequency response compensation lower part of 1 7 4 1 GHz band A20R10 Frequency response compensation middle part of 1 7 4 1 GHz band A20R11 Frequency response compensation upper part of 1 7 4 1 GHz band A20R12 Frequency response compensation lower part of 3 8 8 5 GHz band A20R13 Frequency response compensation upper part of 3 8 8 5 GHz band A20R14 Frequency response compensation lower part of 5 8 12 9 GHz band A20R15 s Frequency response compensation middle part of 5 8 12 9 GHz band A20R16 8 F
186. l Example Unstabilized mode If A 1 3 divisions then x 10 kHz x 10 kHz div X zi div 0 43 X 2 3 div per One Horizontal Division Press AUTO STABILIZER to OFF pushbutton in for unstabilized mode Press ZERO SPAN Pushbutton and adjust FINE TUNING control to place trace between center graticule line and seventh graticule line Adjust PERSIST and INTENSITY controls to provide high persistence with minimum blooming Model 8565A a Model 8565A Performance Tests A a E E ee PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 12 RESIDUAL FM TEST Cont d r Set SWEEP TRIGGER to SINGLE and ERASE CRT Press START RESET pushbutton to display one sweep as shown in Figure 4 9 The maximum peak to peak variation should not exceed the test limit determined in step o 4 13 NOISE SIDEBANDS TEST SPECIFICATION At least 70 dB down greater than 30 kHz from center of CW signal when set to a 1 kHz RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH and a 10 Hz 01 VIDEO FILTER DESCRIPTION A comb generator is used to supply a stable 1 8 GHz signal to the spectrum analyzer The analyzer RESOLUTION BW is set to 1 kHz and VIDEO FILTER is set to 01 The peak of the 1 8 GHz signal is set at 20 dBabove REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line to allow greater readability of the noise sidebands The noise associated sidebands and unwanted responses measured close to the signal must be more than 70 dB e down below 50 graticule line greate
187. l REF LEVEL CAL for 700 mV 1 mV at A2ITPS VIDEO Set REF LEVEL control to 80 dBm and 10 dB step attenuator to 30 dB Adjust A22R3 LIN GAIN see Figure 5 17 for 700 mV at A21TPS Step REF LEVEL control from 50 dBm to 90 dBm and 10 dB step attenuator from 0 dB to 40 dB Check voltage at A21TP5 for each step as shown in Table 5 5 If voltage at A21TPS is not within limits readjust A22R3 LIN GAIN for best compromise Set REF LEVEL to 50 dBM and 10 dB step attenuator to 120 dB Record offset reading at A2ITPS The offset should be less than 30 mV Offset Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 10 dB DIV and set 10 dB step attenuator to 40 dB Adjust front panel REF LEVEL CAL for a digital voltmeter reading of 400 mV plus offset recorded in step h algebraic sum Example If offset is 23 mV adjust REF LEVEL CAL for a DVM reading of 377 mV Set 10 dB step attenuator to 0 dB Digital voltmeter should indicate 800 mV plus offset algebraic sum 1 mV If DVM reading is not within limits adjust A22R2 LOG LIN adjustment for a digital voltmeter reading of 800 mV plus offset minus 50 percent of overshoot Example If DVM indicates 767 mV and should be indicating 777 mV 10 mV overshoot adjust A22R2 for a DVM reading of 777 mV minus 5 mV 782 mV Table 5 5 Linear Gain Adjustment Limits 10 dB Step Voltage Attenuator A21TP5 REF LEVEL 700 mV Reference 700 mV 20 mV 700 mV 20 mV 700 mV 20 mV 700 mV 30 mV
188. l as the Hewlett Packard office Keep the shipping materials for carrier s inspection The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for claim settlement 2 5 PREPARATION FOR USE 2 6 Power Requirements 2 7 The Model 8565A requires a power source of 100 120 220 or 240 Vac 5 10 48 66 Hz Power consumption is less than 220 volt amperes The Model 8565A Option 400 permits operation on 50 60 or 400 Hz mains at voltages specified above 2 8 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection WARNING BEFORE THIS INSTRUMENT IS SWITCHED ON its protective earth terminals must be connected to the 2 9 protective conductor of the mains power cable cord The mains power cable plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protec tive earth contact DO NOT negate the earth grounding protection by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor Failure to ground the instrument properly can result in personal injury CAUTION BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS IN STRUMENT make sure it is adapted to the voltage of the ac power source You must set the voltage selector card correctly to adapt the 8565A to the power source Failure to set the ac power input of the instrument for the correct voltage level could cause damage to the instrument when switched on Select the line voltage and fuse as follows Measure the ac line voltage Refer to Figure
189. l at 18 GHz in Table 5 11 Algebraically subtract Peak Deviation from CRT Actual Deviation for each frequency in Table 5 11 Record corrected deviation in Table 5 11 RES Bw REF LE VEC NPUT ATTEN 106 SCaL 3 MHz 2 dm 0 ATTEN e 2 obj Figure 5 58 Typical Frequency Response 8690B 8696A 5 92 Model 8565A Adjustments e ADJUSTMENTS EMEN PL 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d Table 5 11 Error Characterization of Signal Source CRT Horizontal Corrected Frequency Peak Deviation Displacement Actual Deviation Deviation GHz dB div dB dB Example CRT Horizontal Corrected Frequency Peak Deviation Displacement Actual Deviation Deviation GHz dB div dB dB u Algebraically add the maximum negative corrected deviation and power level recorded at 18 GHz step 1 2 This corrected power level should be within 2 dB of reference set in step h If not change e value of factory selected resistor A28R23 B6 GAIN lower value increases signal level 5 93 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 5 94 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 54 CONFIGURATION A Set A2881 NORM OFF TEST switch to NORM Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 3 8 8 5 GHz INPUT ATTEN to 10 dB REF LEVEL to 0 dBm and RE
190. l bandwidth filter A27C73 Compensates for capacitance of A27C74 Compensates for capacitance of CR11 A27R26 Adjusts feedback in LC circuit of bandpass filter A27R31 Adjusts feedback in crystal circuit of bandpass filter PIN RES Compensates for variations in PIN diode resistance CI Adjust bandpass of 2050 MHz bandpass filter C2 Adjust bandpass of 2050 MHz bandpass filter C3 Adjust bandpass of 2050 MHz band pass filter 2ND LO Adjusts second L O frequency to FREQUENCY 1728 60 MHz 2ND MIXER Adjusts for optimum match between MATCH second converter output and third converter input Model 8565 Reference Designator A36A2C2 A36A2C3 A36A2C16 A37C6 A37A3L4 A37A3R27 A39R40 A40A2R17 Adjustment Name 1 3 MHz NULL LINEARITY 1 MHz PEAK 321 4 MHz BP ADJUST 321 4 MHz BP ADJUST 321 4 MHz BP ADJUST 321 4 MH BP ADJUST 300 MHz BP ADJU 300 MHz BP ADJU OSC PEAK CAL OUT LEVEL DIG INT 15 ADJ Adjustments Table 5 1 Adjustable Components 8 of 8 Adjustment Performance Paragraph Tests Description Adjust to balance out stray capacitance Adjust for linear frequency change with linear sweep input Adjusts center frequency of variable frequency filter Adjust bandpass of 321 4 MHz bandpass filter Adjust bandpass of 321 4 MHz bandpass filter Adjust bandpass of 321 4 MHz bandpass filter Adjust bandpa
191. l can be used to measure the analyzer sensi tivity or noise power from 0 01 to 22 GHz The test set up in Figure 35 is used to make a swept cim oen id noise figure measurement of an amplifier In general this Sweee aah FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN DIV measurement involves determining the total gain of the amplifier under test and the pre amp Then the input of the amplifier is terminated and its noise power is meas ured The noise figure of the amplifier will then be the theoretical noise power KTB minus the total gain and the amplifier noise power Figure 36 is a photo of an ampli Figure 34 Demodulated pulsed RF signal in ZERO SPAN fier s noise power output from 0 01 to 1 3 GHz HP 8565A Low Noise Signal Source Pre Amp Figure 35 Swept noise figure test set up Note Consult AN 150 4 AN 150 7 and AN 150 9 for more information on noise measurements Dama di ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE EMI The overall objective of EMI measurements is to assure compatibility between devices operating in the same vicinity The HP 8565A along with an appropriate trans ducer is capable of measuring either conducted or radiated EMI Figure 37 illustrates a simple set up used for meas uring radiated field strength HP 8565A Q 3 A 300 Ghz SWEEP HME Ory FREQUENCY Figure 36 Noise power measurement Figure 37 Field strength test set up 19 The antenna is used to convert the radiated field to a voltage f
192. lator CW MARKER pointer to 16 4 GHz and AF pointer to 11 9 GHz 119 MHz X10 Press 8620C AF pushbutton and phase lock sweep oscillator as follows 1 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control set to midrange 2 Adjust CW MARKER control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 3 Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control fully counterclockwise Adjust sweep oscillator AF control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 4 Repeat steps n 1 through n 3 until no further adjustment is necessary 5 Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phase locked spectrum analyzer CRT display Figure 5 50 If system is breaking phase lock repeat steps 1 1 through 1 4 e Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 29 PRELIMINARY BIAS ADJUSTMENT Cont d m Adjust A20R6 V6 over full range and note position for minimum ripple on CRT trace Set A20R6 V6 for minimum ripple n Set A28S1 NORM OFF TEST switch to NORM Perform Paragraph 5 31 Frequency Response Adjustment INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 0 sBRHEN 2 dbj AMPLITUDE MARKER PEAK TO PEAK 18 GHz AMPLITUDE VARIATION FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 5 50 Phase Locked Spectrum Analyzer CRT Display 10 5 18 GHz 5 30 YTF TRACKING ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheets 12 and 14 DESCRIPTION With a signal applied to INPUT 509 connector the spectrum analyzer is set to ZERO SPAN Ist L O is CW frequency and the
193. lay Set CHAN A to 10 mV DIV and CHAN B to 1V DIV Set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 Ih 01 1 8 FREQUENCY rk r9 WX y cer a doa aea 0 MHz RESOLUTION BW coupled cece cece eee I 10 kHz FREQSPAN DIV hh hn 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN MODE 2 2 ee eee eee nnn PER DIV FINE TUNING hh tenes midrange AUTO STABILIZER mee Renee Se ela c on on out o Momentarily switch AUTO STABILIZER to OFF to remove dc component on ERROR OUT signal Center oscilloscope trace with oscilloscope position controls p Check slope of oscilloscope trace The trace should not change more than one half vertical division 5 mV for every horizontal division swept Fiv q Adjust FINE TUNING control over its three turn range while observing the oscilloscope trace The trace should not change more than one half vertical division 5 mV for every horizontal divison swept NOTE If slope of oscilloscope trace is within tolerance no further adjustment is necessary If adjustment is necessary do not adjust A36A2R27 1 MHz GAIN This is for factory adjustment only If slope of oscilloscope trace is out of tolerance set up oscilloscope for internal sweep and set 8565A FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to ZERO SPAN and AUTO STABILIZER pushbutton to OFF s Remove A36A2 cover plate Figure 5 46 fo
194. le 1 3 2 34 OPERATIONAL FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURE a Perform Front Panel Adjustment procedure listed on the pull out card located under the 8565A b Connect comb generator 100 MHz comb to the 8565A INPUT 50Q Set all Normal Settings Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz and TUNING to 100 GHz Set each function to the setting shown in Table 2 4 and verify indication is that noted in Table 2 4 NOTE Return to Normal Settings after each Function is checked 2 8 Model 8565A Installation Incoming Inspection INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS Table 2 4 Operational Function Check 1 of 3 SWEEP SOURCE MAN Rotation of MANUAL SWEEP control varies position EXT INT of trace on CRT display SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN No sweep Bright dot on lower left edge of CRT display Sweep visible on CRT display Sweep visible on CRT display LINE Sweep visible on CRT display VIDEO Presence of CRT sweep is dependent on TRIGGER LEVEL setting EXT No CRT trace is visible SINGLE One sweep is triggered when START RESET push button is pressed SWEEP TIME DIV Sweep on CRT display becomes increasingly slower Slowly rotate con trol counterclockwise BASELINE CLIPPER Baseline and lower portion of signal is blanked NOTE Select 1 7 4 1 FREQUENCY BAND GHz and adjust TUNING control to center signal on CRT display Signal amplitude varies Set c
195. le and pull the attenuator and bracket clear of the unit J With the connector to the motherboard in your right hand make a 90 degree fold in the cable towards you Carefully maneuver the new attenuator cable and connector into position over the motherboard connector and install the connector Check that the connector is properly installed before proceeding to the next step oD Route the cable back to the attenuator area using the same routing of the old attenuator cable e Remove the two screws holding the old attenuator to the bracket Place the bracket on the new attenuator and replace the screws Note The round head screw is at the input connector end of the attenuator v Installation Note 5958 7185 Replacement 1 Place the cable connector into the new attenuator and place the attenuator in a convenient place away from the work area Connect cable A29J1 to the motherboard and connect the other three cables that were removed in step 5 above to the front control assembly Replace W9 to the input of AT2 4 Return A2A471 to its original routing and reconnect to the rear switch assembly 5 Install the attenuator and bracket to the side rail using the two round head screws removed earlier Connect W1 to the attenuator input Start the threaded fastener but do not tighten until the front control assembly has been secured in place Carefully replace the front control assembly
196. line Error should not exceed 0 4 division Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 5 MHz Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between fifth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division Set comb generator for 1 MHz comb output Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 MHz and VIDEO FILTER to 1 Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between seventeenth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at graticule reference line Measure error between ninth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 20 4 division Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 5 MHz Adjust TUNING control to position one spectral line at the graticule reference line Measure error between fifth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division Set comb generator for 10 MHz comb output and turn interpolation control on Connect function generator output level high output to modulate the comb generator Set function generator frequency to 200 1 kHz set function to negative pulse and set output level control for a clean 200 kHz comb approximately mid position on the spectrum analyzer display NOTE It may be necessary to readjust function generator output level control
197. ll off Characteristics of a three pole filter nominally 18 dB octave 3 dB bandwidth typically varies from 25 MHz at 1 7 GHz to 70 MHz at 22 GHz AMPLITUDE CHARACTERISTICS DYNAMIC RANGE Maximum power ratio of two signals simultaneously present at the input that may be measured within the limits of speci fied accuracy sensitivity and distortion i e spurious re sponses 0 01 to 22 GHz gt 70 dB Spurious responses Input attenuator set to 0 dB Second harmonic distortion Frequency Range Input Power Relative Distortion 0 01 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 70 dB 100 dB aou below average noise level General Information Model 8565A Table 1 2 Model 8565A Supplemental Characteristics 2 of 4 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS NOTE user information Third order intermodulation Frequency For Two Input Signals With Range Input Power Signal Sep 0 01 22 GHz 25dBm 50 kHz 70 dB May be below average noise level For typical harmonic and third order intermodulation distor tion see Figure 2 Image and Multiple Responses Frequency Image out of band hand mzowe oa oa inge dB gt Spurious Sensitivity 2nd Order Products as am 3rd Order Products 22 GHz 2nd amp 3rd Order Signal Separation 2100 MHz Effective Input Signal Level In
198. ll which corresponds to m 2 4 on the Bessel function The modulation fre quency f is simply the frequency separation of the side bands which is 50 kHz From this we can calculate the peak frequency deviation of the carrier Af peak with the following equation AES BW J3 NE REF LEVEL din INPUT ATTEN g aBRITEN LOG SCALE 10 dbj 0 058 585 fREQUENCY t E SWEEP TIME DIV k Hj FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 29 FM signal 17 _ Af peak or Af peak 2 4 x 50 kHz 120 kHz m REF LEVEL LOG SCALE INPUT LO aBRITEN 30 mE B FREQUENCY 10 50 SWEEP TIME DIV QO Hef FREO SPAN DIV Figure 30 Demodulated FM signal in ZERO SPAN Although the HP 8565A does not have a built in dis criminator FM signals can be demodulated by slope de tection Rather than tuning the signal to the center of the CRT as in AM the slope of the IF filter is tuned to the center of the CRT instead At the slope of the IF filter the frequency variation is converted to amplitude varia tion When ZERO SPAN is selected the amplitude varia tion is detected by the analyzer and displayed in the time domain as shown in Figure 30 In FM the RESOLUTION BW must be increased to yield a display similar to Figure 31 before switching to ZERO SPAN RES BW k Hz REF LEVEL 23 dm INPUT ATTEN B LOG SCALE UN 30 fou k FREQ SPAN DIV 088 fhe
199. lows Set all normal settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 6 eee eee eee te fn 01 1 8 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS amp 5 23 10 REFERENCE AND DIGITAL READOUT ADJUSTMENTS Cont d NOTE For all digital voltmeter measurements use A17TP6 NU tor ground return 10V Reference Adjustment c Connect digital voltmeter to AI7TP1 10VR and adjust A17R11 10VR Figure 5 30 for 10 0000V 0 0002V If unable to adjust A17R11 for 10 V change factory selected resistor A17R9 Decrease in A17R9 decreases voltage d Jumper AI7TPS CENT FREQ to 17 8 and connect digital voltmeter to 17 5 CENT FREQ e Adjust AI7R125 CENTER FREQ OFFSET for a digital voltmeter reading of 0 0000V 0 0002V f Disconnect jumper between 17 5 CENT FREQ and A17TP8 Digital Readout Adjustment g Install 12 DVM Analog Assembly on extender board and connect jumper between 12 7 and A12TP2 Connect digital voltmeter to 12 h Adjust A12R37 INPUT BAL for a digital voltmeter reading of 0 000V 0 001V Reinstall A12 e DVM Analog Assembly i Adjust front panel TUNING control for a 0 0000 V 20 0001V digital voltmeter reading at A17TP5 CENT FREQ j Adjust AI2RS6 ZERO ADJ for a flickering minus sign on the front panel CENTER FREQUENCY digital readout k Adjust TUNING control for a 0 0005V 0 0001 digital voltmeter reading at 17 5 CENT FREQ l Adjust AI2R53 HYST for a CENTER FREQUENCY
200. mV and below lower portion of Log curve A22R102 Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 300 mV and below lower portion of Log curve A22R119 Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 200 mV and below lower portion of Log curve A22R130 Selected to compensate Log fidelity curve for temperature not field selectable A23R19 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 100 kHz e A23R23 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 30 kHz Model 8565A Adjustments Table 5 2 Factory Selected Components 2 of 3 Reference Adjustment Service Designator Paragraph Sheet A23R43 Performance Test Basis of Selection Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 100 kHz A23R48 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 30 kHz A24R55 Option 100 Selected to give correct 18 4 MHz oscillator power level Selected to shift adjustment range of A25R20 DC GAIN A25R23 Option 100 A26R7 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 3 kHz A26R9 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R10 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz A26R17 Option 100 Selected to give correct IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 k
201. microwave FET Field Effect Transistor amplifier Directional couplers and attenuators were used to provide isolation between sources Figure 23 is a CRT photo of a two tone third order intermodulation measurement The third order products 2f f and 2f f are 50 dB below the two tone sig nals f HP 8565A 10 dB Pad 10 dB 10 dB Pad 10 dB cof fo p 50n Termination Figure 22 Two tone test set up REF LEVEL 0 INPUT ATTEN 1 0 BATEN LOG SCALE 10 di 5 89850 FREQUENCY 50 asg SWEEP TIME DIV 50 FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 23 Two tone third order intermodulation products 15 Mixers Mixers utilize the non linear characteristics of an active or passive device to achieve a desired frequency conver sion This results in some distortion at the output due to the inherent non linearity of the device Figure 24 illus trates the test set up and CRT photograph of a typical mixer measurement From a single display the following information was determined Conversion loss SSB RF IF 30 40 10 dB LO to IF Isolation 5 25 30 dB RF to IF Isolation RE sutar 30 57 27 dB Third Order Distortion Product 2 LO RF 64 dBm g 600 MHz RES BW REFLEVEL 1 MHz 10 Bm nei LOG SCALE TEL 10 dB R 0 500
202. mpedance 50 Ohms HP 1250 0774 Cable Assembly SMA Plug both ends HP 8120 1578 o Cable Assembly Type N Connector both ends HP 11500A Test Cable SMA Female to BNC Male HP 11592 60001 Performance Test A Adjustments T Troubleshooting I Incoming Inspection These parts are included in Service Package HP Part Number 08565 60100 e Not required if HP 86290A Opt H08 used Only one required if HP 86290A Opt 8 used Model 8565A Installation Incoming Inspection SECTION II INSTALLATION INCOMING INSPECTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 2 This section includes information on the in itial inspection preparation for use storage ship ment instructions and incoming inspection for the HP Model 8565A 2 3 INITIAL INSPECTION 2 4 Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has been checked mechani cally and electrically The contents of the ship m nt should be as shown in Figure 1 1 Procedures for checking electrical performance are given in Section IV If the contents are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defect or if the instru ment does not pass the electrical performance test notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushion ing material shows signs of stress notify the car rier as wel
203. n assembly Adjustments Reference Designator A7R7I A8R13 A9R2 A9R4 A12R18 A12R37 A12R53 A12R56 14 57 14 68 A14R71 Adjustment Name ASTIG TRACE ALIGN HF ADJUST HF GAIN GAIN GAIN WRITE DEPTH PAT FLG COLLIMATOR INT ORTHOG FOCUS LIMIT HV INT REF ADJ INPUT BAL HYST ZERO ADJ TICK SWP FET OFF VCXO SWP Table 5 1 Adjustable Components 1 of 8 Adjustment Paragraph Service Sheet Performance Tests Model 8565A Description Adjusts astigmatism of CRT display Aligns X and Y axes with graticule display Adjusts risetime of Z axis gate Adjusts high frequency gain of Z axis driver Adjusts gain of Y axis deflection ampl Adjusts gain of X axis deflection ampl Adjusts storage mesh potential Corrects for curvature in CRT trace Adjusts Flood Gun grid voltage Adjusts dispersion of flood gun beam Adjusted to keep intensity constant with changes in persistence Adjusts for perpendicular X and Y axes Sets limit of front panel FOCUS control Adjusts High Voltage Power Supply Sets maximum CRT trace intensity Adjusts negative reference voltage used in DVM Balances DVM input amplifier Adjusts scale offset of DVM near zero Adjusts point where DVM polarity change occurs Adjusts sweep voltage to YTO tickler coil Nulls offset in VCXO sweep voltage Adjusts sweep voltage to VCXO Model 8565A Adjustments Table 5 1 Adj
204. n vertical divisions per one horizontal division A div Distance noted in step e or step m k div Linear vertical portion of trace 3 div e Typical Example Stabilized mode In Figure 4 8 distance A is 0 2 division and distance k a con stant is 3 divisions Therefore X 200Hz 200 Hz eg 1 5 Div P P per one Horiz Division 0 2 div x XHz Div 067 x 2 kHz Div 3 div Use 100 Hz for instrument with Option 100 installed Press ZERO SPAN pushbutton and adjust TUNING control to place trace between center graticule line and seventh graticule line linear portion of signal NOTE With AUTO STABILIZER on the coarse TUNING control large knob can be adjusted in small increments to fine tune the position of the signal displayed Adjust PERSIST and INTENSITY controls to provide high persistence with minimum blooming one sweep as shown in Figure 4 9 The maximum peak to peak variation should not exceed the test limit determined in step f for each horizontal division since SWEEP TIME DIV is 1 SEC and residual FM is specified in a time interval of 0 1 second Set SWEEP TRIGGER to SINGLE and ERASE CRT Press START RESET pushbutton to display e Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 12 RESIDUAL FM TEST Cont d j Repeat steps a through i except set FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 3 8 8 5 and TUNING to 8 500 GHz Locate 8 5 GHz comb tooth in step c REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 106 SCALE
205. nal Packaging Containers and materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available through Hewlett Packard offices If the instrument is being OPTION 908 Rack Flange Machine Screw Pan Head 8 32 x 0 375 inch OPTION 909 Handle Assembly Rack Flange Machine Screw Pan Head 8 32 x 0 625 inch Installation Incoming Inspection returned to Hewlett Packard for servicing attach a tag indicating the type of service re quired return address model number and full serial number Also mark the container FRAGILE to assure careful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number 2 30 Other Packaging The following general instructions should used for repackaging with commercially available materials a Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or plastic If shipping to a Hewlett Packard of fice or service center attach a tag indicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number b Use a strong shipping container A double wall carton made of 275 pound bursting strength corrugated single wall box is sufficient c Use enough shock absorbing material 3 to 4 inch layer around all sides of the instrument to provide firm cushion and prevent move ment inside the container Protect the control panel with cardboard d Seal the shipping container securely e Mark the shipping container
206. nce between trace and characters is not a problem since the LED s are built into the CRT bezel See Figure 18 Lg dl LIES er EE E 438 0 Ghz IOD k Hj Figure 18 CRT display with bezel readout The photo in Figure 18 is a double exposure which was taken with a camera that has variable shutter speed and f stop A double exposure provides the best contrast be tween signal trace graticule lines and CRT bezel readout A step by step procedure for double exposure photography is given below These steps are applicable with the HP 197A or other compatible scope cameras Double Exposure Photography 1 Set the HP 8565A STORE INTEN and SCALE INTEN to the calibrated blue markings 2 Set the camera shutter speed to 1 second and the f stop to 16 3 Push the STORE button on the analyzer to store the trace Press shutter on camera to take first exposure 4 Push the SCALE button on the analyzer to illuminate the graticule lines Wait 2 seconds for display to fully erase Press shutter on camera to take second exposure X Y Recording The HP 8565A is directly compatible with HP s line of X Y recorders as well as strip chart digital or magnetic tape recorders The VERTICAL OUTPUT BLANK OUT PUT and HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT are all avail able from the rear panel of the analyzer X Y recorders can provide full size up to 11 x 14 copies with high resolu tion that are more applicable for folders
207. nce in bench operation The tilt stands raise the front of the in strument for easier viewing of the control panel The Plastic feet are shaped to make full width modular instruments self aligning when stacked 2 20 Rack Mounting Option 908 909 2 21 Instruments with Option 908 contain Rack Flange Kit This kit supplies necessary hardware and installation instructions for preparing the in strument to be mounted on a rack of 482 6 mm 19 inch spacing Installation instructions are also given in Figure 2 2 See Table 2 3 for HP Part Numbers 2 22 Instruments with Option 909 contain Rack Flange Front Handle Kit This kit sup plies necessary hardware and installation structions for preparing instrument with the addition of front handles to be mounted on a Table 2 1 Model 8565A Mating Connectors Connector on Instrument Jil INPUT 509 Type N male connector UG 21G U Type BNC male connector UG 88 U J12 J13 and J3 thru J10 Ji AUX A Series D 24 contact male connector J2 AUX B Series D 17 contact male connector Industry Identification HP Part No 1250 0882 Specialty Connector 25 P117 2 1250 0256 Specialty Connector 28 P118 1 TRW Cinch Div DDM 24W7P 1251 2204 TRW Cinch Div DCMF 17W5P 1251 1285 2 3 Installation Incoming Inspection Plug Type HP Part Number 8120 1351 8120 1703 8120 1369 8120 0696 8120 1
208. nch 5 16 inch slotted box end open end Adapter BNC female to SMA male Alignment tool Test cable subminiature SMC female to BNC male 36 inches long Alignment tool non metalic Adapter BNC female to SMC female used to measure second LO output Connector extractor Tuning tool consists of modified 5 16 inch nut driver with modified No 10 Allen driver General Information HP Part Number 08505 60109 08505 60041 08565 60107 8710 0946 1250 1158 08555 20097 1250 1200 8710 0630 11592 60001 8710 0033 08565 60087 8710 0580 08555 60107 Figure 1 3 Service Accessories HP Part Number 08565 60100 2 of 2 General Information Digital Multimeter Oscilloscope Probe Probe Probe Function Generator Pulse Generator Signal Generator Time Mark Generator Frequency Counter Comb Generator Power Meter Power Meter Thermistor Mount Thermistor Mount Power Sensor Spectrum Analyzer Sweep Oscillator Critical Specifications Range 1000V to 1000V Accuracy 0 004 of reading plus 0 001 of range Input impedance 10 Meg ohms Frequency 100 MHz Sensitivity 5mV Div High Voltage 4KV 10 1 Divider 1 1 Divider Amplitude 0 10V sine wave with dc offset Frequency 1 to 5 kHz Transition time 20 ns Pulse Width 30 ns Pulse Repetition Rate 100us Amplitude 4V p p Frequency 50 to 500 MHz Modulation Frequency 100 kHz Modulation Deviation
209. nd adjust start marker for synchronizer phaselock minimum phase error Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control fully clockwise and stop marker to high frequency of selected spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND Adjust stop marker for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phaselocked spectrum analyzer CRT display If the system is breaking phase lock repeat Steps d 1 through d 3 Note signal level on screen TM 5 89 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d f Set 2851 NORM OFF TEST switch to TEST and front panel INPUT ATTEN to 0 dB Adjust A28R7 PIN RES for same signal level on CRT screen as that noted in step e g Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise and adjust INTENSITY control for normal intensity trace Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 2 dB NOTE The best line as used in the following procedures approximates the median line between the peaks and troughs of the upper edge of the 1 kHz modulation envelope The best line is illustrated in Figure 5 57 h Note the best line as illustrated in Figure 5 57 Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to set lowest point of that line on center horizontal graticule line This point is used as a reference in checking for approximately same power level in FREQUENCY BANDS 5 8 12 9 GHz 8 5 18 GHz and 1
210. nd frequency counter as shown in Configuation A of Figure 4 1 p Check tuning accuracy at frequencies listed in Table 4 1 Set each frequency using the frequency counter Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position signal on center graticule line In dication on FREQUENCY GHz digital readout must be within the test limits given in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Tuning Accuracy Test Limits 3 8 to 22 GHz Bands Spectrum _ RFSouce FREQUENCY GHz FREQUENCY Digital Readout FREQUENCY FREQUENCY ria BAND GHz SPAN DIV GHz Test Limits MHz Mi Max 3 800 6 000 8 500 5 800 8 000 12 900 8 500 12 500 18 000 10 500 16 500 22 000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Frequency set to within 05 Use HP 8690B 8696A with appropriate adapters in place of 8620C 86290A Configuration A of Figure 4 1 14 5 to 40 GHz FREQUENCY BANDS External Mixing ye q Connect equipment as shown in Configuration B of Figure 4 1 Set sweep oscillator frequency for indication of 23 000 20 010 GHz on frequency counter e 4 5 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS i 4 8 TUNING ACCURACY TEST Cont d s Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 MHz and press 14 5 26 6 FREQUENCY BAND GHz pushbutton on spectrum analyzer Adjust TUNING control for an indication of 23 00 GHz on FREQUENCY readout t Adjust EXT MIX
211. nd perform preliminary LC Filter adjust ment as follows 1 Short to ground the following test points A23TP6 A27TP3 and A27TP6 2 Adjust A23C73 for minimum signal amplitude 3 Disconnect short to ground from A23TP6 and connect short to A23TP3 Adjust A23C74 for minimum signal amplitude 4 Reinstall A23 and install A27 BW Filter No 1 Assembly on extender board 5 Disconnect short to ground from A27TP3 and connect short to A23TP3 Adjust A27C73 for minimum signal amplitude 6 Disconnect short to ground from A27TP6 and connect short to A27TP3 Adjust A27C74 for minimum signal amplitude 5 43 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d 7 Remove jumpers to ground and reinstall A27 BW Filter No 1 Assembly Replace covers on A23 and A27 BW Filter Assemblies NOTE When A23 and A27 BW Filter Assemblies are installed with covers in place midget copper alligator clips HP Part No 1400 0483 can be used to short test points to the cover Short to ground A23TP6 A27TP3 and A27TP6 Adjust A23C23 LC CTR to center bandpass display on CRT screen p Disconnect short to ground from A23TP6 Adjust A23C45 LC CTR to center bandpass display on CRT screen q Disconnect short to ground from A27TP3 Short to ground A23TP3 and A23TP6 r Adjust A27C23 LC CTR to center bandpass display on CRT screen s Disconnect short to ground from A27TP6 Adjust A27C45 LC CTR to center bandpass
212. ne ge an OR ROM op ea a e paca ES 0 100 GHz 5 27 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 16 STORAGE DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS Cont d Collimation Set front panel INTENSITY and PERSIST controls fully counterclockwise Press and release front panel ERASE pushbutton Set A7R64 COLLIMATOR adjustment Figure 5 12 for an overcollimated CRT display as shown in Figure 5 13 bright green center area with dark edges INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE D 10 eo BRIGHT AREA DARK EDGES Figure 5 13 Overcollimated CRT Display Set A7R63 FLG Flood Gun Grid Figure 5 12 fully counterclockwise NOTE When adjusting FLG in step g the background brightness will first in crease rapidly then increase more slowly then decrease starting at the edges Set FLG at point of transition from rapid increase to increasing more slowly in pattern brightness Slowly adjust A4R63 FLG clockwise until initial rapid increase in pattern brightness is passed Slowly adjust A7R64 COLLIMATOR Figure 5 12 clockwise until bright green area just fills CRT screen Collimation dimples may protrude as far as 3 millimeters in from the outer edge of CRT Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT to INPUT 500 and adjust INTENSITY and TUNING controls to display the 100 MHz signal at center of CRT screen If CRT background brightness is changing at the sweep rate readjust A7R64 COLLIMATOR to eliminate flickering background brightness 5 28 Model 8565A Ad
213. nect equipment as shown in Figure 4 14 using CAL OUTPUT signal and step attenuator Set step attenuator to 0 dB Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to center signal on CRT c Pull to uncouple and set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 kHz keeping signal centered with FINE TUNING control Set RESOLUTION BW to 10 kHz d Set AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB LOG DIV and set VIDEO FILTER to 01 Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place peak of signal at sixth division from bottom graticule line e e Set the 8565A INPUT ATTEN push in to set and step attenuator to settings indicated in Table 4 10 Record deviation from sixth division for each setting Table 4 10 Input Attenuator Accuracy 100 MHz Step Deviation INPUT ATTEN Attenuator from 6th Step Attenuator Setting Setti Divisi Error d B dS Calibration 0 Ref INPUT ATTEN Corrected Deviation dB Attenuations gt dial settings are positive Attenuations lt dial settings are negative For example 9 99 dB calibration for a 10 dB attenuator setting represents an error of 0 01 dB f To compute the corrected deviation add the step attenuator error to the deviation from 6th division i for each setting The corrected deviation should not exceed 1 0 dB between any two adjacent set tings of the input attenuator 4 35 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 18 g INPUT ATTENUATOR ACCURACY TEST Cont d Record the m
214. nier and first 6 IF Reference Level step gain positions 0 through 50 dBm level with 0 dB input attenuation Output is approximately 10 dBm from 509 for full scale signals on the CRT First LO Output Terminate a 509 load when not in use Frequency 2 00 to 4 46 GHz Power Level typically at 8dBm Stability Typical residual FM Stabilized 30 Hz P P Unstabilized 2 kHz Aux A Interconnection for use with 8750A normalizer Aux B Used during factory calibration General Information Model 8565A Table 1 2 Model 8565A Supplemental Characteristics 4 of 4 e SS SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS NOTE Values in this Table are not specifications but are typical characteristics included for user information DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS CATHODE RAY TUBE Type Post deflection accelerator approximately 8 5 kV ac celerating potential aluminized P31 phosphor electrostatic focus and deflection Graticule 8 x 10 division internal graticule 1 division equals 0 90 cm 0 35 inches with 5 subdivisions per major division Persistence Conventional Natural persistence of P31 phosphor approx imately 40 usec Write Continuously adjustable from 0 2 sec to full storage Storage time gt 1 minute at full brightness in Write mode extending to gt 30 minutes in Store mode at lower bright ness Storage time Store Intensity in Store mode is con tinuously adjustable from 1 minute full brightness to
215. nsitivity is 10 dB better for each band STANDARD OPTIONS AVAILABLE OPTION 100 100 Hz RESOLUTION Adds 3 kHz and 1 kHz resolution BW settings All specifications identical to standard 8565A except Spectral Resolution and Stability Resolution Bandwidths Resolution 3 dB bandwidths from 100 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence Iinput level not to exceed 137 dBuV damage level Selectivity 60 dB 3 dB bandwidth ratio 15 1 for bandwidths 3 kHz to 3 MHz lt 11 1 for bandwidths 1 3 and 1 kHz Stability Total Residual FM Stabilized 100 Hz p p in 0 1 sec 01 8 5 GHz Unstabilized 10 kHz in 0 1 sec 01 4 1 GHz fun damental mixing OPTION 200 CALIBRATION IN dB V Front panel controls read in dBm as in standard instrument All specifications identical to standard 8565A except Bezel readout top line Reference Level Reference level displayed in dBuV given in 1 dB increments from 177 dBuv to 5 dBuV Average noise level with 1 kHz IF bandwidth Band GHz Max Avg Noise Level V wsem Log Reference Level range 177 dBuV1 to 5 dB V in 10 dB steps and continuous 0 to 12 dB calibrated vernier Calibrator Output Amplitude 97 dBeV 0 3 dB OPTION 400 400 Hz POWER SUPPLY Permits operation on 50 60 or 400 Hz mains All specifications identical to standard 8565A except GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 0 to 40 C 50 60 Hz y o 0 to55 C 400 Hz Temperature
216. nt cece ee ee eee eee R ht gn HP 8478B Crystal nn nn HP 33330C e 5 64 Model 8565A e ADJUSTMENTS Adjustments 5 26 THIRD CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d REMOVE TWO SCREWS LOOSEN TWO SCREWS J 6 ADJUST og A37 21 4 MHz OUT 100 MHz TEST J2 J3 anau A our 100 20 Wl r Tee LJ TEST BP FLIER OSC PEAK OSC PEAK CAL OUT LEVEL A3L4 A3R27 321 4 MHz BP ADJUST N C1 J5 A37 BP FILTER THIRD CONVERTER ALIGNMENT PORT ASSEMBLY Figure 5 38 Third Converter Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINEswitch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top and bottom covers b Remove two screws and loosen two screws Figure 5 38 and tilt out A37 Third Converter Assembly c Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 37 and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND 2 RESOLUTION BW FREQ SPAN DIV nx dd a am aos 01 1 8 d Connect test spectrum analyzer to A37J3 100 MHz TEST Adjust A37A3L4 OSC PEAK for maxi mum 100 MHz signal level use non metallic adjusting tool Disconnect test spectrum analyzer e e Connect power meter to front panel CAL OUTPUT connector Adjust A37A3R27 CAL OU
217. nt date and part number both of which appear on the manual s title page Complimentary copies of the supplement are available from Hewlett Packard 1 19 For information concerning a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the Manual Changes supplement contact your nearest Hewlett Packard office 1 10 Model 8565A 1 20 DESCRIPTION 1 21 The HP Model 8565A Spectrum Analyzer provides a visual display of RF signals in the fre quency domain Input signal amplitude is plotted on the CRT as a function of frequency 1 22 The HP Model 8565A is designed for simplicity of operation Most measurements can be made using only three controls once the green Normal Settings have been preset The Model 8565A has absolute amplitude and frequency calibration from 10 MHz to 22 GHz The frequen cy span bandwidth and video filter are all coupled with automatic sweep time to maintain a calibrated display and simplify operation of the analyzer 1 23 Internal preselection eliminates most spur ious image and multiple responses to simplify signal identification The preselector also extends dynamic range of the analyzer as well as provides Some protection for the input mixer 1 24 All major spectrum analyzer control set tings are displayed on the CRT bezel readout The frequency range of the HP Model 8565A is 10 MHz to 22 GHz in direct coaxial input and 14 5 to 40 GHz when used with the HP Model 11517A External Mix
218. ntil they are flush with lock nuts Adjust A37C1 for a dip at center of oscilloscope display as shown in Figure 5 392 Adjust A37C2 for a peak at center of oscilloscope display as shown in Figure 5 39b A v N Adjust A37C3 for dip at center of oscilloscope display as shown in Figure 5 39c 5 Adjust A37C4 for peak at center of oscilloscope display as shown in Figure 5 39d 5 66 E Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5 26 THIRD CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d MINIMUM MAXIMUM A37C1 A37C2 C d MAXIMUM A37C4 MINIMUM A37C3 Figure 5 39 321 4 MHz Bandpass Filter Alignment Oscilloscope Display Adjustments m Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 502 and set 8565A controls as follows RESOLUTION BW 2 eee eee eee hh hh n n n n n n n 3MHz FREQSPAN DIV 0c eee heh 2 MHz Henn nn nnn nn ng 0 100 GHz Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS IU IDEM UM E 5 26 THIRD CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT Cont d n Check 100 MHz signal on spectrum analyzer display has a symmetrical bandpass A typical bandpass shape is shown in Figure 5 40 If bandpass symmetry is worse than shown in Figure 5 40 small adjustments of A37C1 through A37C4 should be performed to improve bandpass shape However do not sacrifice more than 1 dB of signal amplitude when adjusting for best bandpass shape loss of signal amplitude reduces instrument sensitivity 3 MHZ BW RESOLUTION REF LEVEL IMP
219. nuator male connector 3 Place the attenuator in the module with the two SMA connectors pointing toward the top of the module Carefully fit and connect the input and output rigid cables to the attenuator 4 5 being careful not to damage the center conductor fingers or the center conductor of the attenuator connector through the use of excessive force Place the two old screws with lock washers into the attenuator mounting bracket and secure the attenuator to the module 2 Connect the ribbon cable to the PC board assembly connector dressing the cable to ensure that it is not pinched by the cover 6 The rigid coax cable connectors should be torqued to a recommended 10 inch pounds using a 5 16 inch torque wrench The attenuator mounting screws should be torqued to a recommended 20 inch pounds 9 Replace the module cover 10 Perform all Final and RF Input Return Loss tests found in the Module Verification test list Figure 1 HP 70XXX Attenuator Replacement 4 Installation Note 5958 7185 Section 2 HP 8565A HP 8569A HP 8569B and HP 8570A Spectrum Analyzers The following removal and installation procedure applies to HP 8565A HP 8569A HP 8569B and the HP 8570A Spectrum Analyzers Keep track of where the hardware is used during the disassembly process the same hardware will be used in the installation procedure Note The attenuator bracket allen screws and washers included in the Atten
220. o check VCXO linearity y Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top and bottom covers 5 29 PRELIMINARY BIAS ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 19 DESCRIPTION NOTE This is a preliminary adjustment and requires that the Frequency Response Adjustment 5 31 also be performed A synchronizer and sweep oscillator are connected to make a tracking generator for the 8565A The sweep oscillator is phase locked on each FREQUENCY BAND checked and mixer bias adjustments are performed for minimum amplitude variation consistent with near minimum conversion loss across the FREQUENCY BAND 5 76 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 29 PRELIMINARY BIAS ADJUSTMENT Cont d 21 4 MHZ IF OUTPUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER Z AXIS MKR PENLIFT ERROR SIGNAL OUTPUT BLANKING SWEEP OSCILLATOR EXT SWEEP INPUT SWEEP OUT SPLITTER CRYSTAL ADAPTER DETECTOR Figure 5 47 Preliminary Bias Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Sweep oscillator 6 le n IA HP 8620C 86290A H08 Synchronizer lesen nnne HP 8709A H10 Power Splitter eee II HP 11667A Option 002 Crystal Detector 0 cece eee be nn nnn HP 33330C Adapter APC 7 to Type N Male HP 11525A e Adapter APC 7 to SMA Female HP 11534A 5 77 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS 5
221. oise decreases 10 dB for every factor of 10 reduction in RESO LUTION BW The SWEEP TIME DIV when in AUTO position will automatically select the proper sweep speed whether the RESOLUTION BW is coupled or uncoupled and operated independently RES BW 30 k Wz RES BW iD k H 20 mse SWEEP TIME DIV REF LEVER SER Bm FREQUENCY REF LEVEL 11 dm 1 10 1 GHz FREQUENCY REF LE VEL 4 dm 1 10 i GHz SREGUENCY INPUT ATTEN BATEN INPUT ATTEN 0 ATEN FRE INPUT ATTEN 1 Q eBRITEN 200 LOG SCALE 10 dB k Hel PAN DIV LOG SCALE 10 dj EBU k Hi PAN DIV 10 dBi k Hz FPEQ SPAN Figure 12 a 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz RBW c 10 kHz RBW REFERENCE LEVEL The main purpose of the REF ERENCE LEVEL control is to set the absolute power of the REFER ENCE LEVEL top graticule line on the CRT When the peak of a signal is at the REFERENCE LEVEL its absolute power in dBm will be indicated on the bezel readout as well as on the REFER ENCE LEVEL control knob The REFERENCE LEVEL control along with the IN PUT ATTEN has a range of 172 dB from 102 dBm to 70 dBm Although the REFERENCE LEVEL is cali Maximum Input Level 100 Sensitivity 110 Reference Level A brated from 30 to 70 dBm signal levels should never exceed 30 dBm since that is the maximum power the analyzer can withstand wi
222. on See Figure 4 3 g Set spectrum analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control to 200 MHz Set TUNING control for FREQUENCY readout of approximately 8 GHz h Tune sweep oscillator CW output for a frequency counter indication of 7 000 005 GHz Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position signal at graticule reference line far left of display i Tunesweep oscillator CW output for a frequency counter indication of 8 600 005 GHz j Measure error between signal peak and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division See Figure 4 3 k Connect equipment as shown in Configuration B of Figure 4 2 without connecting function generator Set comb generator for 100 MHz comb output l Setspectrum analyzer FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 01 1 8 FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control to 100 MHz Set TUNING control for a FREQUENCY readout of 0 800 GHz m Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to position one spectral line from comb generator at graticule reference line first graticule line at far left of display Measure error between ninth spectral line and eighth graticule line Error should not exceed 0 4 division See Figure 4 4 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS j 22 4 9 SPAN WIDTH ACCURACY TEST RES Bw REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 10G SCALE 3 Mh 10 dm 1Q BATEN NE 30 4 DIVISION FIRST GRATICULE LINE CW SIGNAL GRATICULE REFERENCE LINE EIGHTH GRATICULE LINE 9 486 6z 500 Mhi FRE
223. ons at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard Company further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Stand ards Organization members WARRANTY AND ASSISTANCE This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and work manship for a period of one year from the date of shipment Hewlett Packard will at its option repair or replace products which prove to be defective during the warranty period provided they are returned to Hewlett Packard Repairs necessitated by misuse of the product are not covered by this warranty NO OTHER WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HEWLETT PACKARD IS NOT LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Service contracts or customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products that require maintenance and repair on site For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Model 8565A General Information Dr Sut SPECTR js NAM pei 1 EE pi aet ak ret oo 2 FRU wo m 5 gt 8565
224. ontrol for maximum signal amplitude Rotate over full range PRESELECTOR PEAK NOTE Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 100 kHz and adjust TUNING control to center signal on CRT display OFF depressed AUTO STABILIZER Tuning of signal with coarse TUNING control is continuous ON out Tuning of signal with coarse TUNING control causes signal to jump off CRT display 2 9 Installation Incoming Inspection Model 8565A INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS e Table 2 4 Operational Function Check 2 of 3 E RENE NOTE Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 100 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN MODE PER DIV Signals are displayed at one division intervals NOTE Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 MHz and adjust TUNING con trol to center signal on CRT display ZERO SPAN CRT trace is a straight line and FINE TUNING control affects signal amplitude FULL BAND Twenty five comb teeth are visible and baseline marker position is determined by coarse TUNING control 1 7 22 GHz SPAN Baseline rises on CRT display from left to right in five steps See Section Figure 11 AMPLITUDE SCALE 10 dB LOG DIV 10 dB change in REF LEVEL changes signal amplitude Center signal on by one division 0 1 division CRT display NOTE Set REF LEVEL and REF LEVEL FINE to position signal peak 0 5 divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line Center signal on CRT display with TUNING control 5 dB LOG DIV Signal peak one division belo
225. or a 21 4 MHz 3 dBm output Adjust signal generator output frequency for maximum signal level on CRT display f Adjust A24R6 12 dB Figure 5 25 for maximum signal level on CRT display Then adjust A24R6 counterclockwise to set signal level 0 4 division below maximum g Adjust signal generator output level to position CRT trace on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line h Set REF LEVEL FINE control to 0 dB and 1 dB step attenuator to 0 dB Adjust A24R5 0 dB to positon CRT trace on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line me j Turn off signal generator RF Power and note offset voltage at A2ITPS Offset mV k Turn on signal generator RF power and set output level to 0 dBm Adjust A24R4 RF GAIN for 800 mV plus the offset measured at A21TP5 in step j If A24R4 does not have sufficient adjust ment range change value of A27R3 An increase in resistance will decrease voltage at A21TP5 l Perform step gain adjustments for each REF LEVEL and 10 dB step attenuator setting in Table 5 9 m Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord remove extender board install A28 Variable Gain Amplifier Assembly and install 8565A top cover Table 5 9 REF LEVEL Step Gain Adjustment 10 dB Step Attenuator Voltage A21TP5 0 dB A24R4 GAIN Reference 800 mV offset 10 dB A24R3 10 dB Reference 20 mV A24R2 20 dB Reference 20 mV None Reference 20 mV Reference 20 mV 2481 4
226. or the analyzer to measure The field strength will be the analyzer reading plus the antenna correction factor Figure 38 illustrates a typical signal generated by a DUT Device Under Test with spurious radiation LOG SCALE 10 Bi RES BW he REF LEVEL 10 dm INPUT ATTEN 1 0 BRIEN SWEEPTIMEOIV FREQUENCY Figure 38 Spurious radiation Compatibility is also important for high frequency cir cuits which are in close proximity to each other In a multi stage circuit parasitic oscillation from one stage can couple to a nearby stage and cause unpredictable behavior A popular technique used to search for spurious 20 radiation is with an inductive loop probe The loop probe is simply a few turns of wire that attaches to the spectrum analyzer with a flexible coaxial cable See Figure 39 HP 8565A DOO OOUDR ggg Figure 39 Loop probe Various parts of the circuit can then be probed to identify the location as well as the frequency and relative amplitude of a spurious signal Once the spurious signal has been identified design techniques can be implemented to reduce or eliminate the cause of interference Note Consult AN 150 10 and AN 63E for more informa tion on EMI measurements Appendix A TING PRECAUTI The spectrum analyzer is a sensitive measuring instru ment To avoid damage to the instrument do not exceed the following Absolute Maximum
227. ormal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ f n nn 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN a qoe ed AO oe dose ati 0 dB REF LEVEL ad OE eS Co EES 0dBm REF LEVEL FINE 2 2 cece eee eee 0 RESOLUTION BW 1 cece cee eee t hh hh hn nn 300 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN MODE 1 cece eee n n n n nn ZERO SPAN AMPLITUDE SCALE cee ce ccc cree ere th n nh n n ng LIN 5 7 hh hh hh ttn OFF TUNING wo seas ee e Re euh ER RAV RUE RES RR 0 100 GHz Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _____ _ 5 19 VIDEO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT Cont d c Adjust front panel VERT POSN to set CRT trace on bottom horizontal graticule line and note offset voltage at A21TP5 VIDEO Offset mV d Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 500 connector and adjust front panel TUNING control to peak 100 MHz signal on CRT display e Adjust front panel REF LEVEL FINE control for 800 mV plus offset measured at A21TP5 in step c f Adjust ASR27 GAIN Figure 5 19 to set signal level on REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line g Disconnect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal and repeat steps c through f until no further adjustment is necessary h Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 50Q connector and set AMPLITUDE SCALE
228. orts are removed one at a time and the respective crystal filter is adjusted for a symmetrical and centered bandwidth The LC filters are adjusted by a similar method The 3 dB bandwidths are checked for each RESOLUTION BW and if necessary adjustments are performed to give correct bandwidths 21 4 MHZ IF OUTPUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER Figure 5 20 Bandwidth Filter Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Frequency 5340A Crystal Short Qty tech DAN RU p oes See Figure 5 19 A crystal short consists of a 01 uF capacitor HP Part No 0160 0161 and 90 9 ohm resistor HP Part No 0757 0400 connected in series Two square terminal connectors HP Part No 0362 0265 are used for connecting the crystal short across the test points CAPACITOR RESISTOR RECEPTACLES Figure 5 21 Crystal Short Configuration e 5 40 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 20 BANDWIDTH FILTER ADJUSTMENTS Cont d A21 STANDARD R52 R55 R58 R77 m7 R71 I kHz kHz 10 kHz 3 MHz 1MHz 300 kHz E ng TOP VIEW 21 23 27 VIDEO ASSY BW FILTER BW FILTER A21 OPTION 100 R55 R58 R77 R74 R71 3 kHz 10 kHz 3 MHz 1MHz 300 Hz TITS d zo 8 s do ei Ee TNI T If A23 A27
229. ory selected resistors listed in Table 5 12 Each resistor in a set must have a value within 10 percent of the other resistors X Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top cover Table 5 12 Factory Selected Resistors Resolution BW Factory Selected Resistors 3 dB BW Limits A26R9 A26R10 A26R19 A26R20 A26R29 A26R30 0 8 to 1 2 kHz A26R39 A26R40 A26R49 A26R48 A26R7 A26R18 A26R28 A26R37 A26R46 255 to 345 Hz A26R17 A26R27 A26R36 A26R45 A26R64 85 to 115 Hz 5 104
230. pe 5 96 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS M M 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d an ao ap aq ar as Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 54 CONFIGURATION A Select 8565A FREQUENCY BAND of 1 7 4 1 GHz and set SWEEP SOURCE to EXT Set synchronizer ERROR SIGNAL switch to Set 8620C sweep oscillator CW MARKER pointer to 2 9 GHz and AF pointer to 2 4 GHz Depress 8620C AF pushbutton Phase lock sweep oscillator and set output power level as follows 1 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control fully clockwise 2 Adjust sweep oscillator AF control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 3 Set sweep oscillator manual sweep control to midrange Adjust CW MARKER control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error 4 Repeat steps 1 through an 3 until no further adjustment is necessary 5 Disconnect power splitter from 8565A INPUT 50Q and connect power meter to power splitter output 6 Slowly adjust sweep oscillator manual sweep control over its entire range and adjust power level for an average power meter reading of 8 dBm 7 Disconnect power meter and reconnect power splitter output to 8565A INPUT 502 8 Set sweep oscillator to automatic sweep mode and check for phase locked spectrum analyzer CRT display If system is breaking phase lock repeat steps an 1 through an 4 Adjust A20R9 B2A A20R10 B2B and A20RI1
231. position trace at 7 1 divisions above graticule baseline 4 12 8565 Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 10 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d e Tune signal generator frequency until trace drops to 5 divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on 8640B MHz Tune signal generator frequency in opposite direction of step e until trace peaks 7 1 divisions and then drops to 5 divisions above graticule baseline Record frequency displayed on 8640B 49431 MHz The difference between results of steps e and f is the measured resolution bandwidth at 3 dB points Min Actual 2 52 Max 2 55 MHz j 3 45 MHz Set RESOLUTION BW to 1 MHz Tune signal generator to 100 MHz and repeat steps c through g Min Actual Max 850 kHz Lo nti m 1 15 MHz Set RESOLUTION BW to 300 kHz Tune signal generator to 100 MHz and repeat steps c through g Min Actual Max 255 kHz 345 kHz Set RESOLUTION BW to 100 kHz Tune signal generator to 100 MHz and repeat steps c through g Min Actual Max 85 kHz TOME ect 115 kHz Set RESOLUTION BW to 30 kHz Tune signal generator to 100 MHz and press EXPAND X10 pushbutton to provide greater resolution on frequency readout remember to include overflow when reading frequency Enable spectrum analyzer AUTO STABILIZER pushbutton out and repeat steps c through g Min Actual Max 25 5 kHz 34 5 kHz Set RESOLUTION BW to 10
232. put Attenuation dBm Input signal levels above 0 dBm may cause gain compression FIGURE 2 Optimum Dynamic Range Chart 1 6 Values in this table are not specifications but are typical characteristics included for AMPLITUDE ACCURACY The overall amplitude accuracy of a measurement depends on an analyzer s performance and the measurement technique used Applying IF substitution eliminates errors due to the display bandwidth gain variation scale factor and input atten uator step size Only IF gain variation reference level change with input attenuation constant lt 1 0 dB calibrator ampli tude lt 0 3 dB and frequency response remain In brief IF substitution minimizes error by minimizing contro changes from the reference measurement e g calibration For measurements in the Frequency Bands covering 1 7 to 22 GHz that don t require the best possible accuracy the front panel preselector peak may be left centered in its green setting This adds typitally lt 1 0 dB of error to the reference level value at room temperature Input Attenuator at preselector input 70 dB range in 10 dB steps Step size variation X 1 0dB 01 to 18 GHz H 5dB 01to22 GHz Maximum cumulative error over the 0 to 70 dB range lt 4 2 1 dB 01 to 12 4 GHz lt 12 4dB 01 to 18 GHz lt 04 01 to 22 GHz _Reference Level Variation For any change of scale factor x1 dB FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY Fo
233. r RF Section Input 01 22 GHz INPUT ATTEN Automatic Stabilization Circuit Signal Paths 1 7 22 GHz 2 01 1 8 GHz PRESELECTOR PEA F OPE where f signal frequency fio local oscillator frequency f intermediate frequency The first IF in the HP 8565A is set at 321 4 MHz and the first LO sweeps from 2 0 to 4 46 GHz Therefore from equation 1 f would cover approximately 1 68 to 4 14 GHz in fundamental operation With harmonic mixing given by equation 2 2 f nf fi where n harmonic number 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 the frequency range is extended to 40 GHz Each harmonic number creates a tuning curve which is illustrated in Fig ure 45 page 28 Signal frequencies from 0 01 to 1 8 and 1 7 to 22 GHz are converted to a 2050 MHz and 321 4 MHz IF respectively with the broadband internal mixer In the 1 7 to 22 GHz frequency range the YIG tuned filter tracks a particular tuning curve and thus eliminates spuri ous responses resulting from harmonic mixing From 14 5 to 40 GHz an external waveguide mixer is used to convert the input signals to a 2050 MHz IF which is then further processed by the analyzer AUTOMATIC STABILIZATION SECTION Many factors can limit the resolution of the spectrum analyzer Among these are the local oscillators stability and spectral purity and the IF filters bandwidth and shape factor Of these limitations
234. r seeriat HP 11667 Opt 002 Crystal Detectors se ser erect ve HP 33330C IDUB Attenuator a EX ERRAT VES UNA sexe HP 8492A Test Cable SMA Female to BNC Male Part of Service Package HP P N 08565 60100 HP 11592 60001 Adapter APC 7 to Type N HP 11525A Adapter APC 7 to N Female HP 11524A Adapter APC 7 to SMA HP 11534A Adapter Waveguide to SMA Jack 2 required Narda 4608 Adapter N Plug SMA 1 HP 1250 1250 Adapter Type N Female to SMA Female HP 86290 60005 Cable Assembly cresine acceso ur acte ya decipi es Ge a hee HP 8120 1578 Function HP 3312A 4 40 Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS asin a re ee ae 4 20 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Cont d PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHz sse n n 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN ehe he hh hh hr OdB REFLEVEL see hh HH ehh mem than 0 dBm REF LEVELFINE 2 e xii We Ex erm E xe RES E eher 0 RESOLUTION BW lesse nn nn 3 MHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN DIV sees n 2MHz TUNING 2 ccc ccc ee ehh rr ehh nnn 0 100 GHz AMPLITUDE SCALE
235. r ecu ASSEMBLY Figure 5 27 Sweep Generator Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 26 and set 8565A controls as follows i Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green RESOLUTION BW eee hh hh hh ntn 10 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 0 cee eee cee nnn 100 MHz SWEEP TRIGGER sah ame een eee ees eds SINGLE 5 51 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS L 5 20 SWEEP GENERATOR ADJUSTMENTS Cont d NOTE The 10V Temperature Variable Supply 10VTV must be adjusted while the spectrum analyzer is still cold during first five minutes of operation If instrument has been operating turn off spectrum analyzer and remove A16 Sweep Generator Assembly Let A16 assembly cool off for 15 Minutes Replace A16 and proceed with adjustment of A16R9 10 VTV during first five minutes of operation Connect digital voltmeter to AIGTP3 10 and use AIGTP4 for ground return Adjust A16R9 10 for 10 00 volts 0 01 volts Connect digital voltmeter to AIGTP6 INT SWP and use A16TP4 for ground return Check that voltage at AIGTP6 is 5 00 V 0 02 V If not perform 15 volt adjustment in Paragraph 5 12 NOTE Adjustment of A16R74 SWP STOP Figure 5 27 is performed by noting the sweep ramp voltage just prior to sweep retrace
236. r access to test points and center A36A2C3 LINEARITY t Connect 1 3 MHz 3 volt peak to peak signal from signal generator through a 1 1 probe to A36A2TP3 connect ground clip to chassis ground u Connect oscilloscope through 10 1 probe to 2 and adjust A36A2C2 1 3 MHz NULL for minimum 1 3 MHz signal Disconnect signal generator from A36A2TP3 v Connect oscilloscope through 10 1 probe to A36A2TP2 and adjust A36A2C16 1 MHz PEAK for maximum 1 MHz signal w Reinstall A36A2 cover plate and repeat steps n through q If slope of oscilloscope trace is out of tolerance steps p and q make adjustments as follows o M 5 75 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS a 5 28 TUNING STABILIZER CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS Cont d NOTE Do each of the following adjustments in small steps and switch AUTO STABILIZER OFF then ON after each adjustment 1 Adjust A36A2C3 LINEARITY and A36A2C16 1 MHz PEAK for minimum slope of oscilloscope trace 2 Check slope of oscilloscope trace while adjusting FINE TUNING control over its three turn range Oscilloscope trace should not change more than one half vertical divison 5 mV per horizontal division swept 3 Repeat steps w 1 and w 2 until no further adjustment is necessary x Check Tuning Stabilizer Control Adjustments steps c through m If VCXO SWP adjustment is performed repeat steps n through q t
237. r than 30 kHz from center of CW signal COMB SPECTRUM ANALYZER GENERATOR onn ananon INPUT 5022 OUTPUT Figure 4 10 Noise Sidebands Test Setup EQUIPMENT Comb Generator ec ec ee ee ee eee eee teens HP 8406A e 4 23 Performance Tests Model 8565A 4 13 PERFORMANCE TESTS NOISE SIDEBANDS TEST Cont d PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BANDGHz esee 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN nie sheet ada ete fe Php EU aig ON xs 0 dB REF EEVED Lone e eue OR ere a ate 30 dBm RESOLUTION gt RR eES VES Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 2 MHz TUNING zi io wack ts hae ke hole oath ER d 1 800 GHz b Connect comb generator output to spectrum analyzer INPUT as shown in Figure 4 10 Set comb generator for maximum output amplitude c Locate 1 8 GHz comb tooth and center it on CRT Reduce FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 10 kHz keeping signal centered on CRT with FINE TUNING control d Adjust REF LEVEL FINE control to place signal peak at top graticule line REFERENCE LEVEL e Set REF LEVEL control to 50 dBm to place signal peak 20 dB above REFERENCE LEVEL f Set SWEEP TRIGGER to SINGLE and set VIDEO FILTER to 01 Set PERSIST control fully clockwise and press START RESET pushbutton If blooming occurs reduce INTENSITY ERASE
238. r typical frequency response and sensitivity versus input fre quency see Figure 3 ES LEN Typical Frequency Response Excursion Limits Amplitude dBm 1MHz 10 MHz 100 MHz 1GHz 10 GHz Frequency FIGURE 3 Average Noise Level vs Input Frequency e F4 N PEN Model 8565A General Information Table 1 2 Model 8565A Supplemental Characteristics 3 of 4 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS NOTE user information Values in this table are not specifications but are typical characteristics included for SIGNAL INPUT CHARACTERISTICS INPUT 500 0 01 TO 22 GHz Input connector Precision Type N female Input impedance Input attenuator at 0 dB 50 ohms nominal SWR 1 5 0 01 101 8 GHz 2 0 1 7 to 22 GHz at analyzer tuned frequency Input attenuator at 10 dB or more 50 ohms nominal SWR 1 3 0 01 101 8 GHz 2 0 1 7to22 GHz LO Emission 2 00 to 4 46 GHz 50 dBm 0 01 to 1 8 GHz 85 dBm 1 7 to 22 GHz Input Protection For input signals from 01 to 22 GHz 0 01 to 1 8 GHz Frequency Band Internal diode limiter 1 7 to 22 GHz Frequency Bands Saturation of YIG filter preselector occurs at total input signal power levels below input mixer damage EXTERNAL MIXER INPUT BNC female connector is a port for LO power trans
239. replaced by the operator The ac line cord should be disconnected from the power source then the other end discon nected from the instrument With the power cord removed access may be gained to the fuse com partment by sliding open the power module cover door The fuse may be removed by pulling the lever inside the fuse compartment Replace with fuse of correct rating and type for ac line voltage selected Fuse ratings for different voltages are indicated below the power module Access to the other eight fuses requires removing the instrument s covers The internal fuses should only be replaced by a qualified service technician 3 5 Air Filter Inspect the rear panel air filter frequently and if necessary remove and clean it To clean the filter wash it in warm water and detergent Dry the filter thoroughly before reinstalling it on the instrument Unrestricted air flow gives longest component life Keep the air filter clean 3 6 Calibration To ensure that the 8565A meets specifications listed in Table 1 1 Per formance Tests Section IV should be performed every six months 3 1 REFACE INTRODUCTION TO SIGNAL ANALYSIS The spectrum analyzer is an instrument that displays signals in the frequency domain The CRT on the analyzer displays signal amplitude A on the vertical axis and frequency f along the horizontal axis A method of visualizing how a spectrum analyzer views the frequency domain is to picture
240. requency Figure 4 Then by pushing the green PER DIV button the signal at the marker will become the center frequency of the analyzer Figure 5 In PER DIV the desired frequency span can be adjusted with the FRE QUENCY SPAN DIV control Figure 6 graphically illus trates the procedure for locating a signal RES BW REF LEVEL Mie 3 de INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE EE SWEEP TIME DIV Figure 4 Tuning marker in FULL BAND RES Bw REF LEVEL 30k 3 de INPUT ATTEN 10 LOG SCALE LEES FREQUENCY 1 SWEEP FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 5 PER DIV mode Set desired FREOUENCY BAND while in FULL BAND Frequency Span Mode V ms VERSUS Rei imc FREQUENCY GHz NFREQUENCY BAND GHz EXT MIXER 2 41 i 0 PUSH 11 i Gum ZERO dB NORMAL pum im ee jo ATUN PRESELECTOR PEAK AUTO STABILIZER FREQUENCY SPAN MODE m fo AMPLITUDE SCALE 4 22 GHz STABILIZED ZERO PER FUIL 17 22 GHz LOG DIV Sune ony SPAN 1098 5dB 248 TUNING control sets Reset to PER DIV and Position signal on marker which will be adjust FREQUENCY top REFERENCE center frequency in SPAN DIV LEVEL line PER DIV mode Amplitude eee RES BW REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 304 k 3 de 10 5H 1 SWEEP TIME DiV FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN Div
241. requency response compensation e lower part of 8 5 18 GHz band Model 8565A Adjustments Table 5 1 Adjustable Components 4 of 8 Reference Adjustment Adjustment Service Performance m t A20R17 Frequency response compensation middle part of 8 5 18 GHz band A20R18 gt i Frequency response compensation upper part of 8 5 18 GHz band A20R19 Frequency response compensation lower part of 10 5 22 GHz band A20R20 Frequency response compensation lower middle part of 10 5 22 GHz band A20R21 Frequency response compensation upper middle part of 10 5 22 GHz band A20R22 Frequency response compensation upper part of 10 5 22 GHz band A2O0RI100 Frequency response compensation upper part of 5 8 12 9 GHz band A21R52 Adjusts IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 kHz Not used for Option 100 A21R55 Adjusts IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 3 kHz A21R58 Adjusts IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 10 kHz A21R71 300 kHz Adjusts IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 300 kHz A21R74 Adjusts IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 1 MHz A21R77 3 MHz Adjusts IF bandwidth for RESOLU TION BW of 3 MHz A21R92 OFFSET Nulls offset between LIN and 1 dB AMPLITUDE SCALE at top screen A22RI LOG GAIN Adjusts dc offset circuitry at output of Log amplifier for 10 dB steps in Log mode Adjustments Model 8565A Table 5 1
242. required to order all parts and assemblies g SECTION VII MANUAL BACKDATING CHANGES contains backdating information to make this manual compatible with earlier equipment configurations diagrams parts location diagrams and troubleshooting procedure to aid the user in maintaining the instrument 1 4 Supplied with this manual is an Application Note entitled Operating the 8565A Spectrum Analyzer This Application Note should be kept with the instrument for use by the operator 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS 1 6 Instrument specifications are listed in Table 1 1 These specifications are the performance stan dards or limits against which the instrument is tested Table 1 2 lists supplemental characteristics Supplemental characteristics are not specifications but are typical characteristics included as addi tional information for the user NOTE To ensure that the 8565A meets specifications listed in Table 1 1 Performance Tests Section IV should be performed every six months 1 7 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1 8 General 1 9 This is a Safety Class I instrument and has been manufactured and tested according to inter national safety standards 1 10 Operation 1 11 BEFORE APPLYING POWER make sure the instrument s ac input is set for the available ac line voltage that the correct fuse is installed and that all normal safety precautions have been taken See Warnings below 1 1 General Information Model 8565A Ta
243. rocedure 1 36 Option 909 Rack Flange Front Handle Kit 1 37 Option 909 HP Part Number 5061 0084 consists of one Option 907 Front Handle Kit and one Option 908 Rack Flange Kit see descriptions above See Figure 2 2 for installation procedure 1 38 Option 910 Additional Operating and Service Manuals 1 39 Option 910 provides additional Operaing and Service manual s The number of additional manuals depends on quantity of Option 910 s ordered To obtain additional Operating and Ser vice manuals after initial shipment order by manual part number refer to title page or rear cover of manual 1 40 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED 1 41 Figure 1 1 shows the HP Model 8565A Spectrum Analyzer and line power cord Two 50 ohm terminations HP 11593A s are also supplied One termination is connected to the front panel EXT MIXER port and the other is connected to the rear panel 1st LO OUTPUT port General Information 1 42 EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE 1 43 Service Accessories 1 44 A Service Accessories Package is available for convenience in aligning and troubleshooting the specrum analyzer The Service Accessories Package is shown in Figure 1 3 The package may be obtained from Hewlett Packard by ordering HP Part Number 08565 60100 1 45 Measurement Accessories 1 46 HP Model 11517A External Mixer This mixer extends the frequency range coverage of the HP Model 8565A to 40 GHz Transition sections HP Model 11518 11519A and 11520
244. rs 2 and 3 Rotate the attenuator into position and reconnect SMA connector 1 Tighten SMA connectors 2 and 3 Replace two screws 4 11 Perform all Final tests found in the Module Verification test list Installation Note 5958 7185 2 PLACES Figure 2 HP 70300A Option 001 Attenuator Replacement 1 of 2 Installation Note 5958 7185 10 Figure 2 HP 70300A Option 001 Attenuator Replacement 2 of 2 Installation Note 5958 7 185 HEWLETT PACKARD OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUAL 8565A SPECTRUM ANALYZER Includes Options 100 200 and 400 SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to HP Model 8565A Spectrum Analyzer having serial prefix number 1712A For additional important information about serial numbers see INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY MANUAL in Section I Copyright HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 1977 1400 FOUNTAIN GROVE PARKWAY SANTA ROSA CALIFORNIA U S A MANUAL PART NO 08565 90014 MICROFICHE PART NO 08565 90015 Printed August 1977 SAFETY This instrument has been designed and tested according to International Safety Requirements To ensure safe operation and to keep the instrument safe the information cautions and warnings in this manual must be heeded Refer to Section I for general safety considerations applicable to this instrument CERTIFICATION Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this instrument met its published speci ficati
245. s ORR EURO RRO 88 MUNI iy Gc UG Gy a a To aid in familiarization of the front panel controls a fold out illustration of the HP 8565A is included on page 24 Also any reference to the front panel controls are made in CAPITAL LETTERS E Chapter The HP 8565A Spectrum Analyzer is a sensitive meas uring instrument To avoid damage to the instrument do not exceed the following Absolute Maximum Inputs NORMAL SETTINGS The Normal Settings are those settings which are used for the majority of measurements For instance 10 dB DIV INT sweep and AUTO sweep time are most often used so they are classified as Normal Settings All the Normal Settings on the HP 8565A are colored green so that the user can easily identify and set them initially Table 1 lists all the green Normal Settings of the HP 8565A Table 1 Normal settings CRT DISPLAY BASELINE CLIPPER FREQUENCY SPAN DIV M Push in RESOLUTION BW t e o coupl FREQUENCY SPAN MODE PER DIV AMPLITUDE SCALE 10 dB DIV VIDEO FILTER OFF SWEEP SOURCE INT SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN SWEEP TIME DIV AUTO Center in PRESELECTOR PEAK green area With Normal Settings preset most measurements can be made with just three knobs TUNING FREQUENCY SPAN DIV and REFERENCE LEVEL 1For more detailed information regarding Operating Precautions please refer to Appendix A ING THE HP TUNING adjusts
246. s case find the signal level on the Effective Signal Input horizontal axis and go vertically to the appropriate sensitivity curve The maximum obtainable dynamic range is read from the Signal Noise Ratio vertical axis IMPROVING MEASUREMENT ACCURACY The technique known as IF substitution can be used to improve measurement accuracy on the HP 8565A IF sub stitution is a method of using only the accurate IF gain of the analyzer to position the signal on the calibrated REFERENCE LEVEL line In this way errors due to the CRT non linearity log amplifier input attenuator and bandwidth filter will be eliminated The IF gain of the analyzer is controlled with the calibrated REFER ENCE LEVEL knob The steps for achieving accurate amplitude measurements with IF substitution are as fol lows Amplitude Measurement With IF Substitution 1 Set the INPUT ATTEN to 10 dB or greater This in sures a good input SWR to minimize mismatch errors 2 Set the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV control to the de sired frequency resolution 3 Connect the CAL OUTPUT signal to the analyzer to verify calibration 4 Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal and connect the signal to be measured 5 Set the desired FREQUENCY BAND and use only the TUNING control to center the signal on the CRT 6 In the 1 7 to 22 GHz frequency range adjust the PRE SELECTOR PEAK control to maximize the signal level 5 7 Now using only the REFERENCE LEVEL control and FINE vernier
247. sed because of the wider resolution bandwidths The HP 8565A has a 3 MHz RESOLUTION BW which enables it to effectively display pulsed RF signals in the pulse spectrum The 3 MHz bandwidth along with fast sweep times also enables narrow pulse widths to be meas ured in the time domain Figure 33 illustrates a signal in the pulse spectrum The same signal is demodulated with the analyzer in Figure 34 LOG SCALE 10 dBi RES BW 30 k REF LEVEL dm INPUT ATTEN 0 dBRIEN A e 402 5H SWEEP TIME DIV FREQUENCY LOO k Hel FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 33 Pulse spectrum An additional factor to consider when measuring pulsed RF signals is the VIDEO FILTER control In general the VIDEO FILTER should be left in the OFF position when measuring pulsed RF signals Adding video filtering will desensitize a pulsed signal and limit its displayed ampli tude Hence when monitoring pulsed signals in a full band mode it is important to use the F mode rather than the FULL BAND pushbutton mode The FULL BAND mode automatically engages a 9 kHz VIDEO FILTER 0 003 x 3 MHz which will limit the displayed amplitude of the pulse F LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 1 0 4BATIEN 10 dBi Note Consult AN 150 2 for more information on pulsed RF NOISE Applications involving noise measurements include os cillator noise spectral purity signal noise ratio and noise figure The NOISE AVG position of the VIDEO FILTER contro
248. spectrum analyzer to position one comb tooth at graticule reference line far left d Note position of ninth spectral line comb tooth It must be on eighth graticule line 0 4 division See Figure 2 4 Her LEVEL INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 10 Bm D LU 10 98 FIRST GRATICULE LINE EIGHTH GRATICULE LINE 0 4 DIV FOR SPANS 100 MHz TO 2 MHz PER DIV GRATICULE REFERENCE LINE COMB SIGNALS FIRST SPECTRAL LINE NINTH SPECTRAL LINE 100 FREQ SPAN DIY SPAN Dt Figure 2 4 Span Width Accuracy Measurement e a M 2 13 Installation Incoming Inspection Model 8565A INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS ese 2 36 FREQUENCY SPAN WIDTH AND RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST Cont d e 2 14 Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIVto 10 MHz with RESOLUTION BW coupled and comb generator to 10 MHz Repeat steps c and d Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz and comb generator to 1 MHz Repeat steps c and d NOTE The wider FREQUENCY SPANIDIV settings are checked using a comb generator The narrow FREQUENCY SPANIDIV settings are checked by observing RESOLUTION BW accuracy as follows Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 2 MHz RESOLUTION BW to 1 MHz and AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB Connect spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to INPUT 500 and tune spectrum analyzer to 0 100 GHz Center signal on display and use REFERENCE LEVEL controls to position peak of signal to REFERENCE LEVEL line Note width o
249. ss of 321 4 MHz bandpass filter Adjust bandpass of 300 MHz bandpass filter Adjust bandpass of 300 MHz bandpass filter Peaks 100 MHz crystal oscillator Adjsuts 100 MHz CAL OUT to 10 dBm power out Adjusts intensity of digits on bezel digital readout Adjusts 15 volt power supply Adjustments Model 8565A Table 5 2 Factory Selected Components 1 of 3 e Reference Adjustment Service Performance Designator Paragraph Sheet Test Basis of Selection Selected so A17R11 10 VR can be adjusted to give 10V at 17 A20R29 Selected for best frequency response on high end of 5 8 12 9 GHz FREQUENCY BAND Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 700 mV and above upper portion of Log curve A22R16 Selected for full screen translation from Log to linear mode A22R23 Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 700 mV and above opposite sense of A22R8 A22R46 Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 600 mV and above upper portion of Log curve A22R63 Selected to compensate Log fidelity curve for tem perature not field selectable e A22R64 Selected to compensate Log fidelity curve for tem perature not field selectable A22R65 Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 500 mV and above upper portion of Log curve A22R74 Selected for proper gain of Q9 Q10 IF gain in linear mode with 10V at IFG4 sixth IF gain step A22R82 Selected for best Log fidelity curve at 400
250. stment i Adjust front panel VERT POSN to set CRT trace on bottom horizontal graticule line and note voltage at 21 5 5 31 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 17 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL GAIN ADJUSTMENTS Cont d j Connect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal to INPUT 500 connector and adjust front panel TUNING control to peak 100 MHz signal on CRT display k Adjust front panel REF LEVEL FINE for 800 millivolts plus offset measured in step i at A2ITPS Ensure signal is peaked with front panel TUNING control l Adjust ASR27 GAIN to set signal level on top horizontal graticule line m Disconnect 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal and repeat steps i through until no further adjustment is necessary n Adjustment complete Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install 8565A top cover 5 18 LOG AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 24 DESCRIPTION Step attenuators are used to change spectrum analyzer input signal level in calibrated steps The A21 Video Assembly output is monitored and adjustments are performed to calibrate the A22 Log Amplifier Assembly SPECTRUM ANALYZER A21TP5 DIGITAL VOLTMETER 10 dB STEP 1 dB STEP ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR Figure 5 16 Log Amplifier Adjustment Test Setup EQUIPMENT Digital HP 3490A e 10 dB Step Attenuator HP 355D H80 1 dB Step
251. surement of modulation levels A 0 06 modu lation is a logarithmic ratio of 70 dB which is easily meas ured with the HP 8565A Figure 26 is a signal with 2 AM a log ratio of 40 dB REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 600 SCALE 0 BAEN 10 08 Figure 26 2 When the analyzer is used as a manually tuned receiver ZERO SPAN the AM is demodulated and viewed in the time domain To demodulate an AM signal uncouple RES BW REF LEVEL 1 B din INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 1 0 dBRUEN 550 fre 500 k Hef WEEP OME FRE FR Figure 27 Linear amplitude display the RESOLUTION BW and set it to a value at least twice the modulation frequency Then set the AMPLITUDE SCALE to LIN and center the signal horizontally and ver tically on the CRT See Figure 27 By pushing ZERO SPAN and VIDEO triggering the modulation will be dis played in the time domain See Figure 28 The time vari ation of the modulation signal can then be measured with the calibrated SWEEP TIME DIV control RES Bw MH BEF LEVEL 18 dBm INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 50 FREQUENCY Hef SWEEP ply REQ SPAN Otv Figure 28 Demodulated AM signal in ZERO SPAN FM For frequency modulated signals parameters such as modulation frequency fm modulation index m peak frequency deviation of carrier Af peak are all easily measured with the HP 8565A The FM signal in Figure 29 was adjusted for the carrier nu
252. sweep analyzer across frequency span selected Caution Maximum input level is 40 V Input impedance is 100 EXT TRIGGER INPUT With SWEEP TRIGGER in EXT a positive voltage gt 1 V will trigger internal sweep source TRIGGER LEVEL adjusts point from 1 to 10 V on trigger waveform which starts sweep DC coupled positive slope triggering Caution Max imum input is 40 V Input impedance is 100 BLANKING INPUT Permits external blanking con trol of CRT TTL compatible high gt 2 V blanks CRT low 0 5 V or an open circuit retains normal CRT operation Caution Maximum input is 40 V Input impedance is 10 1ST LO OUTPUT A 2 0 to 4 46 GHz 8 dBm nom inal output coupled from first local oscillator Termi nate with 500 load when not in use See Appendix D for information on LO for each FREQUENCY BAND 21 4 MHz IF OUTPUT A 21 4 MHz output linearly related to the RF input to analyzer Bandwidth con trolled by analyzer RESOLUTION BW setting Am plitude controlled by INPUT ATTEN REF LEVEL FINE and first six REFERENCE LEVEL step gain positions 0 to 50 dBm with 0 dB INPUT ATTEN Output is approximately 10 dBm for full scale sig nals on CRT Output impedance is 500 AUX A Interconnection jack for interfacing HP 8750 Storage Normalizer to analyzer AUX B Interconnection jack for factory calibration of analyzer POWER LINE MODULE Line voltage selector card allows choice of 100 120 220 or 24
253. t 100 oscillator Fy 100 Hz BW A25C24 Opt 100 LO NULL Nulls fundamental and harmonics of the 18 4 MHz oscillator in the 21 4 MHz signal path A25R20 Opt 100 DC GAIN Sets the amplitude of the 1 kHz 3 kHz and 1 kHz resolution band width to agree with the 1 MHz amplitude A26C2 Opt 100 A26C3 Opt 100 A26C12 Opt 100 A26C13 Opt 100 SYM adjustments adjust the shape of the filter skirts CTR adjust ments optimize centering and minimize amplitude of the filter shape A26C19 Opt 100 A26C20 Opt 100 A26C25 Opt 100 A26C26 Opt 100 A26C32 Opt 100 SYM A26C33 Opt 100 CTR A26R53 Opt 100 100 Hz GAIN Sets the gain of the 100 Hz resolution bandwidth 5 7 Adjustments Model 8565A Table 5 1 Adjustable Components 7 of 8 Reference Adjustment Adjustment Performance Designator Name Paragraph Tests Description A2 IC15 Adjusts symmetry of first stage of crysal bandwidth filter A27C23 Adjusts centering of first stage of LC bandwidth filter A27C25 Adjusts centering of first stage of crystal bandwidth filter A27C38 Adjusts symmetry of second stage of crystal bandwidth filter A27C45 Adjusts centering of second stage of LC bandwidth filter A27C54 Adjusts centering of second stage of crysta
254. t CAL OUTPUT to INPUT 500 and tune 8565 to center the signal on the CRT display If necessary adjust FREQ CAL for a reading of 0 100 on FREQUENCY GHz display Check that Bezel Display frequen cy also indicates 0 100 GHz The calibration of the FREQUENCY GHz display in the other FREQUENCY BANDS is verified as follows l 2 Tune 8565 for an indication of 1 800 GHz on FREQUENCY GHz digital readout Connect comb generator to spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 and tune 8565A to center 1 8 GHz comb tooth on CRT display FREQUENCY GHz digital readout must be 1 800 GHz 0 005 GHz Select 1 7 4 1 FREQUENCY BAND GHz and set TUNING control for an indication of 3 000 GHz on FREQUENCY GHz digital readout Center 3 GHz comb tooth on CRT display FREQUENCY GHz digital readout must be 3 000 GHz 20 006 GHz Set TUNING control for an indication of 4 000 GHz on FREQUENCY GHz digital readout Center 4 GHz comb tooth on CRT display FREQUENCY GHz digital readout must be 4 000 GHz 0 008 GHz Select 3 8 8 5 FREQUENCY BAND GHz and set TUNING control for an indication of 5 000 GHz Center 5 GHz comb tooth on CRT display FREQUENCY GHz digital readout must be 5 000 GHz 0 010 GHz 2 36 FREQUENCY SPAN WIDTH AND RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATION Span Width Accuracy The frequency error for any two points on the display for spans from 500 MHz to 20 kHz Div unstabilized is less than 5 of the indicted separation for stabili
255. ter vertical graticule line f Verify PRESELECTOR PEAK is centered in green region and without making adjustments recheck tracking by repeating step e g Set 1951 YTF TRACK switch to NORM Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install e 8565A top cover 5 84 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 30 TRACKING ADJUSTMENT Cont d Table 5 10 YTF Tracking Adjustment Adjustment Group Frequency Band Frequency Tracking Adjustment 2 0 GHz AI9RI4 OFFSET Adjustment Effect Overall Offset 1 7 4 1 GHz 4 0 GHz AI9RI7 GAIN Overall Gain 3 8 8 5 GHz 4 0 GHz A17R43 YTF OFFSET N2 Offset 3 8 8 5 BAND 3 8 8 5 GHz 8 5 GHz A19R17 GAIN Overall Gain 5 8 12 9 GHz 8 5 GHz A17R50 YTF OFFSET N3 Offset 5 8 12 9 BAND 5 8 12 9 GHz 10 5 GHz A19R17 YTF GAIN Overall Gain 8 5 18 GHz 10 5 GHz 8 5 18 GHz 13 0 GHz 8 5 18 GHz 16 0 GHz 8 5 18 GHz 18 0 GHz 17 57 OFFSET 4 AI9R39 YTF LIN 13 A19R42 YTF LIN 16 AI9R45 YTF LIN 18 Offset 8 5 18 BAND A Gain above 10 GHz A Gain above 14 GHz A Gain above 16 GHz 10 5 22 GHz 10 5 22 GHz 10 5 22 GHz 10 5 GHz 20 0 GHz 22 0 GHz A17R64 OFFSET N5 19 48 YTF LIN 20 A19R51 YTF LIN 22 Offset 10 5 22 GHz BAND A Gain above 18 GHz A Gain above 20 GHz 4 DIVISIONS Fi
256. the center fre quency of the analyzer It also posi tions the marker in the full band modes FREQUENCY SPAN DIV sets the horizontal frequency calibration on the CRT An optimum RESO LUTION BW is automatically se lected for a given frequency span REFERENCE LEVEL Genes JSPUT OT TES PUSH trol sets the vertical amplitude cali bration on the CRT The REFER ENCE LEVEL top graticule line on the CRT represents an absolute power level in dBm Changes in RF INPUT ATTEN will also change the indicated REFER ENCE LEVEL BOS Ag rape aft MAXIM NE ROE vs SIMPLIFIED SIGNAL ANALYSIS The internal CAL OUTPUT sig nal is a convenient source to demon strate how fast and easy the HP 8565A can measure frequency and amplitude Start by presetting the green Normal Settings listed in Table 1 page 2 This sets the analyzer in its normal three knob operation mode Now connect the CAL OUTPUT signal to the INPUT connector of the analyzer and begin the measurement procedure Initially select the FREQUENCY BAND that includes the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal Use the TUNING control to tune the 100 MHz signal to the center of the display The FREQUENCY SPAN DIV may be increased to facilitate tuning Once the signal is centered on the display adjust the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to the desired resolution Since there is no modulation on the CAL OUTPUT signal a 1 MHz DIV span is sufficient Retune the signal to th
257. thout damage In Figure 13 the REFERENCE LEVEL was adjusted to position f on the REFERENCE LEVEL line of the CRT The absolute power of f then is 30 dBm The level at f can be read from the calibrated CRT display as 30 dBm 50 dB 20 dBm If desired a low level signal can be positioned on the REFERENCE LEVEL line to read its power level directly on the bezel readout f in Figure 13 is positioned on the REFERENCE LEVEL line to read 80 dBm direct The REFERENCE LEVEL line on the CRT is deter mined by a combination of IF gain REFERENCE LEVEL control and RF attenuation INPUT ATTEN The outer control knob adjusts the IF gain in 10 dB steps A FINE vernier knob provides continuous control from 0 to 12 dB INPUT ATTEN AMPLITUDE SCALE 10 dB DIV INPUT ATTEN Reference Level Range 172 dB Figure 13 REFERENCE LEVEL control diagram ESAE ATTEN PUSH Tab Marker Yellow No Blue No Pushing the outer knob in allows RF attenuation blue numbers from 0 to 70 dB to be selected The numbers outlined in yellow indicate the MAXIMUM signal input allow able prior to signal compression A reminder light is lit whenever 0 dB INPUT ATTEN is selected Unless making noise measurements or when maximum sensitivity is required a minimum INPUT ATTEN of 10 dB should always be used This insures a good input SWR and will minimize uncertainties due to mismatches V
258. ting see example The corrected deviation should not exceed 1 0 dB between any two adjacent settings of the input attenuator Example Deviation REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN Corrected Setting from Corrected Deviation dB aa iun dB 0 Ref 0 0 1 10 10 3 20 0 2 30 10 2 30 w Record the maximum positive and maximum negative corrected deviation values computed in Table 4 11 The difference between these two values should not exceed 2 4 dB dB Max Neg Corrected Deviation e Max Pos Corrected Deviation dB Max Cumulative Error Total Deviation i a _ 4 37 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 19 CALIBRATOR OUTPUT ACCURACY TEST SPECIFICATION Calibrator output 10 dBm 0 3 dB 100 MHz 10 kHz DESCRIPTION The calibrator output level is measured using a power meter The frequency of the calibrator output signal is measured using the counter input of the HP 8640B POWER SIGNAL SPECTRUM ANALYZER METER GENERATOR COUNTER INPUT THERMISTOR ADAPTER MOUNT Figure 4 15 Calibrator Output Accuracy Test Setup EQUIPMENT Power Meter CL HP 432A Thermistor Mount usce rx 9 REA ING Pee x S a HP 8478B Signal HP 8640B Adapter Type N Female to BNC Male
259. to 8 5 GHz band or the 5 8 to 12 9 GHz band The sensitivity however is better in the 3 8 to 8 5 GHz band 6 OENES tly REF LEVEL INPUT ATTEN 0 d BATEN tOG SCALE 10 dB 20 asg SWEEP TIME DIV ae 000 Ghe F b FREQUENCY FREQ SPAN DIV Figure 11 1 7 22 GHz SPAN mode The five frequency span modes available on the HP 8565A provide the user with maximum flexibility in mak ing measurements Table 2 summarizes the characteristics of each FREQUENCY SPAN MODE RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH FREQUENCY SPAN DIV O 55 RESOLUTION BW UMHz ks OPTIMUM PuLL TO mo UNGOUPLE In Normal Setting the RESOLU TION BW is optimally coupled to the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV by aligning the green markers gt 9 and pushing the controls in to cou ple Once the controls are coupled at OPTIMUM the best RESOLU TION BW will be automatically chosen for any frequency span se lected The RESOLUTION BW can also be coupled at a position other than OPTIMUM For certain applications independent control of RESO LUTION BW may be desirable By pulling out either con trol knob the RESOLUTION BW will be decoupled thus allowing different RESOLUTION BW settings to be se lected Figure 12 illustrates how an AM signal with 200 kHz sidebands is displayed with various RESOLUTION BW settings Also note that the narrower RESOLUTION BW will yield increased sensitivity since random n
260. to ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY SPAN MODE and repeak signal on CRT display l Adjust AI9R14 YTF OFFSET to center passband on CRT display Figure 5 33 m Set FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 5 8 12 9 Tune spectrum analyzer to 10 0 GHz and peak signal on CRT display Remove hysteresis by switching to FULL BAND then back to ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY SPAN MODE and repeak signal on CRT display n Adjust AI9R17 YTF GAIN to center passband on CRT display Figure 5 33 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS aS A _ _ 5 24 YIG DRIVER ADJUSTMENT Cont d o If tracking adjustment was required perform adjustments in Paragraph 5 30 If not set A19S1 YTF TRACK switch to NORM Set LINE switch OFF disconnect power cord and install A14 Tuning Stabilizer Control Assembly Install 8565A top cover INPUT ATTEN LOG SCALE 0 de NULLI 10 cB 10dB POINTS TEST MODE HORIZONTAL CALIBRATION IS 20 MHz DIV f i Figure 5 33 YTF Passband Display for YIG Driver Adjustment A tell m 9 25 SECOND CONVERTER ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE Service Sheet 7 DESCRIPTION The second converter L O is adjusted for 1728 60 MHz and the second converter bandpass filter is ad justed for a 2050 MHz bandpass If the second converter bandpass filter requires significant frequency tuning for correct bandpass adjustment then the coarse bandpass
261. uator Retrofit Kit HP part number 5062 6418 are not required the HP 8565 y HP 8569A HP 8569B or HP 8570A Discard these parts Removal 1 Looking at the front of the instrument remove the top cover Turn the unit upside down and remove the left side cover and the bottom cover Loosen FL4 on the output of AT2 and pull free from AT2 Loosen W1 the input rigid coax cables connected to the attenuator closest to front panel Remove W2 the rigid coax cable going from the attenuator output to K2 Remove the HP 11593 502 load from the EXT mixer input Remove the six screws three top and three bottom holding the front control assembly to the frame Very carefully pull the front control assembly clear of the unit Remove the two screws in the left side frame piece that hold the attenuator bracket in place Pull W1 free of the attenuator input and remove the attenuator and bracket Place the removed assembly in an area clear of the immediate work area Remove the cables connected to the front control assembly with the exception of A2A2J1 which is connected to the frequency display control Carefully pull the assembly to the side e Pull A29J1 off the motherboard this will allow you to gain access to the attenuator cable connection to the motherboard Remove the connector Loosen W9 the rigid coax cable connection to the input of AT2 Noting the attenuator cable routing remove the cab
262. uators are obsolete and are to be replaced with new designs when a failure occurs This Installation Note documents the recommended procedure for replacing the attenuator in the instruments listed above Section 1 describes the procedure to replace attenuators in the HP 70XXX instruments except the HP 70300A Option 001 The 85XX instrument procedure is described in Section 2 and the HP 70300A Option 001 is described in Section 3 Ordering Information Table 1 describes the different retrofit kits available and their HP part numbers Table 1 Retrofit Kit Ordering Information Order Kit Includes Replaces Retrofit Kit C New Attenuator Old Attenuator Instrument HP Part Number D HP Part Number HP Part Number HP 8565A 5062 6418 3 5086 7842 5086 7365 HP 8569A HP 8569B HP 8570A Option 001 HP 70600A HP 70601 5062 6420 5069 6419 a 50867843 5086 7724 5086 7849 5086 7837 Table 2 describes the contents of the retrofit kit Table 2 Attenuator Retrofit Kit Contents 1 Attenuator Attenuator Ribbon Cable Screw Allen Washer 2 Installation Note 5958 7185 o Section 1 HP 70XXX Instruments except HP 70300A Option 001 The following removal and installation procedure applies to HP 70XXX instruments except HP 70300A Option 001 Keep track of where the hardware is used during the disassembly process some of the parts screws and bracket are reused Removal 1
263. ully counterclockwise The CRT background brightness is set by adjusting the Flood Gun Grid voltage The Collimation adjustment is then made for a Flood Gun pattern that just covers the CRT screen WRITE DEPTH is set so the CRT screen turns dark green after the display is erased The Intensity Persistence ad justment is set for a trace of approximately the same brightness in either the maximum or minimum per sistence settings 5 26 Model 8565A Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 5 16 STORAGE DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS Cont d A7 TOP VIEW A7R70 ATR17 A7R64 INT WRITE DEPTH COLLIMATOR 5 m m Sehr Be EP s ULM STORAGE of ASSEMBLY ae TI M LM nii A1A2 A1A2R11 SCALE Ju ii 1 a B B eree eerti e o oseo 2 ir Figure 5 12 Storage Assembly Adjustment Locations PROCEDURE a Set LINE switch OFF disconnect powet cord and remove 8565A top cover b Reconnect power cord set LINE switch ON and set 8565A controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHZ 01 1 8 INPUT ATTEN o cpu ak I ovn BIE ew LA TR eae RE OR arate gie 10 dB REP LEVEL ROS eee DI acis e AGI PR eor e 10 dBm REFLEVELEINEB dk Red x e os COE SAS FER IE ada freed rada 0 RESOLUTION BW 44v iw oF i oa nA a wes a eS 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV eee eee eer hh hn 2MHz TUNING ton
264. um amplitude variations of upper edge of envelope on CRT trace Set A20RS to several positions over its range and readjust A20R2 V5 for minimum amplitude variations at each setting Set 2065 to position giving minimum amplitude variations and adjust A20R2 V5 for minimum variations Repeat step ad Set 85654 FREQUENCY BAND to 10 5 22 GHz Set sweep oscillator for a MARKER SWEEP of 10 5 GHz to 22 GHz Phaselock sweep oscillator and set output power level according to step w Adjust A20R19 B6A A20R22 B6B A20R21 B6C and A20R20 B6D to set best line at the center horizontal graticule line with minimum slope Adjust A20R6 V6 for minimum amplitude variations on CRT trace Repeat step ag 5 95 Adjustments Model 8565A ADJUSTMENTS e 5 31 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ADJUSTMENT Cont d NOTE Steps ai through am are the flatness adjustment procedures for the 10 5 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND using standard sweep oscillators 8620C 86290A and 8690B 8696A If steps af through ah have been successfully completed do not perform steps ai through am ai Set 8565A FREQUENCY BAND to 10 5 22 GHz Set 8620C sweep oscillator CW MARKER pointer to 16 4 GHz and AF pointer to 11 9 GHz Phase lock sweep oscillator and set output power level as follows 1 Set sweep oscillator to manual sweep mode with manual sweep control set to midrange 2 Adjust CW MARKER control for synchronizer phase lock minimum phase error Set sweep oscillator manual sweep
265. using RF substitution external calibrated attenuator The accurcy is also checked at 18 GHz using IF substitution The IF gain reference level variation previously recorded in Table 4 6 is taken into account when measuring attenuator accuracy at 18 GHz SWEEP RF 3 SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLATOR PLUG IN 019 INPUT 5022 STEP ATTENUATOR 355D OPT H80 10 dB ATTENUATOR ADAPTER Thre An Figure 4 14 Input Attenuator Accuracy Test Setup EQUIPMENT Sweep Oscillator RF Plug in HP 8620C 86290A Step Attenuator 10 dB step HP 355 Opt 80 10 dB HP 8491B Opt 010 Adapter N Male to BNC Female HP 1250 0780 di 4 34 Model 8565A e PERFORMANCE TESTS Performance Tests 4 18 INPUT ATTENUATOR ACCURACY TEST Cont d PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND gt 01 1 8 INPUTATTEN orien dpa Ex de de eo eos ode ly Sea Satara oru sheet d 60 dB RBFPLEVED se tsa eet bbe 4a AR NALE EG RO a dX es 0 dBm RESOLUTION BW Coupled pushed in FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 2 MHz TUNING i eo eua iu ieee eek Seius auus Ma pire ed aec 0 100 GHz Con
266. ust be within 0 5 division 10 of center graticule line for sweep times up to and including 1 second per division and 1 0 division 20 for 2 5 and 10 second per division sweeps 4 50 o Model 8565A Performance Tests PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 23 SWEEP TIME ACCURACY TEST Cont d TIME MARK SIGNAL SPECTRUM ANALYZER BENERATOR GENERATOR INPUT 5022 OUTPUT Figure 4 21 Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup EQUIPMENT Signal Generator 2 25 2421 9 oe hen Fae ee ie woes HP 8640B Time Mark Generator HP 226A PROCEDURE a Set spectrum analyzer controls as follows Set all Normal Settings controls marked with green FREQUENCY BAND GHX enr hehe x an Sew er SA 01 1 8 INPUTATTEN 245 Sates eS UE jade Gos RP PIRE RUE E Eas 10 dB REF LEVELS mE RR 10dBm REF LEVEL FINE ideasi uv e tes Pa ea eee 0 RESOLUTION BW 0 cece eee eens 3 MHz Uncoupled FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 92 Glace o ae ea EO ROI ind one 10 MHz TUNING 4 5 5223 Te ds Se PRE ero bag note Rd S 0 500 GHz b Setsignal generator for an unmodulated 500 MHz output at approximately 0 dBm c Connect equipment as shown in Figure 4 21 leaving 8640B AM switch in OFF position d Adjust spectrum analyzer TUNING control to center signal on CRT Set FREQUENCY SPAN MODE to ZERO SPAN and set SWEEP TRIGGER to VIDEO e S
267. ustable Components 2 of 8 Reference Designator Performance Tests Adjustment Name Adjustment Paragraph Description 15653 MAIN SWP OFFSET Compensates for offset between wide and narrow frequency span widths A16R9 10VTV Adjusts 10 volt temperature variable supply AIGRIS IMS Calibrates 1 ms per division sweep time AI6RI9 2MS Calibrates 2 ms per division sweep time AI6R25 AST LIMIT Adjusts AUTO sweep time current limit AI6R74 SWP STOP Sets maximum positive sweep ramp voltage 17 11 10VR Adjusts 10 volt reference supply A17R43 YTF OFFSET N2 Adjusts YTF sweep offset on 3 8 8 5 GHz FREQUENCY BAND 17 50 OFFSET N3 Adjusts YTF sweep offset on 5 8 12 9 GHz FREQUENCY BAND A17R57 YTF OFFSET N4 Adjusts YTF sweep offset on 8 5 18 GHz FREQUENCY BAND YTF OFFSET NS A17R64 Adjusts YTF sweep offset on 10 5 22 GHz FREQUENCY BAND A17R125 CF OFF Nulls offset in center frequency analog voltage YTO OFFSET Adjusts YTO lower frequency to 2 05 GHz AI9R8 YTO GAIN Adjusts YTO upper frequency to 4 4 GHz A19R14 YTF OFFSET Adjusts YTF tracking at 2 GHz AI9RI7 YTF GAIN Adjusts YTF tracking at 10 GHz YTF LIN 13 A19R39 Adjusts YTF trac
268. viation in Linear Mode to Deviation in dB POSITIVE DEVIATIONS NEGATIVE DEVIATIONS Above 6th division Below 6th division from graticule baseline from graticule baseline Linear Linear divisions divisions 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 deu Reference Level Fine Vernier variation k Replace 10 dB step attenuator with 1 dB step attenuator Set step attenuator to 0 dB Set spectrum analyzer REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm REF LEVEL FINE control to 0 AMPLITUDE SCALE to 1 dB LOG DIV and VIDEO FILTER to OFF 1 Adjust signal generator output level until peak of trace is at sixth division Set step attenuator and REF LEVEL FINE control to settings indicated in Table 4 9 Record the deviation from the sixth division for each setting i m To compute the corrected deviation add the step attenuator error to the deviation from 6th division for each setting The corrected deviation should not exceed 0 5 dB or 0 5 dB 4 31 Performance Tests Model 8565A PERFORMANCE TESTS e 4 16 REFERENCE LEVEL VARIATION TEST Cont d Table 4 9 Reference Level Fine Vernier Variation Step REF Step Attenuator Attenuator LEVEL Deviation from Error Cali Corrected Setting FINE 6th Division bration Deviation dB Setting dB dB dB 0 Ref 3 0 Ref 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Attenuations dial settings are positive Attenuations dial settings negative 4 17 GAIN COM
269. w time delay etc are used for replacement The use of repaired fuses and the short circuiting of fuseholders must be avoided When it is likely that the protection has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended op eration if this instrument is to be energized via an auto transformer for voltage reduction make sure the common terminal is connected to the earthed pole of the power source BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE IN STRUMENT the protective earth ter minals of the instrument must be connected to the protective conduc tor of the mains power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in socket outlet provided with a protec tive earth contact The protective ac tion must not be negated by the use of an extension cord power cord with out a protective conductor ground ing Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside the instrument or discon necting the protective earth terminal is likely to make this instrument dangerous CAUTIONS BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS IN STRUMENT make sure instrument s ac input is set to the voltage of the ac power source see Figure 2 1 BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS IN STRUMENT make sure the ac line fuse is of the required current rating and type normal blow time delay etc General Information 1 15 INSTRUME
270. w REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line 0 25 division 2 dB LOG DIV Signal peak 2 5 divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line 0 6 division 1 dB LOG DIV Signal peak 5 divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line 1 2 divisions LIN Signal peak 3 5 divisions below REFERENCE LEVEL graticule line 1 0 division Display Function Conventional CRT trace No variable persistance control CRT trace brightness adjusted by INTENSITY and trace fade rate adjusted by PERSIST When depressed CRT trace is erased background momentarily brightens then CRT trace is again displayed Model 8565A Installation Incoming Inspection Table 2 4 Operational Function Check 3 of 3 Display Function Cont d Stores trace on CRT display Rotating STORE INTEN changes brightness and fade rate of stored trace CRT trace is erased and graticule is illuminated with uniform background brightness Background bright ness adjusted by SCALE INTEN control NOTE Set FREQUENCY SPAN DIV to 1 MHz and center signal on CRT display with TUNING control SIG IDENT Two signals on CRT display Signal identifier signal is two divisions to left of comb tooth and is also lower in amplitude Bezel Display Bezel display shows actual settings of major front panel controls Step through each Each step decreases baseline noise level and decreases switch position sweep speed Sweep speed increases when switching to clockwise NOISE position an
271. wly tune through the entire frequency band using the sweep oscillator manual sweep control Note the maximum and minimum excursions and set manual sweep control for a power meter indication midway between the maximum and minimum excursions Turn RF power off and zero the power meter Turn RF power on and adjust RF plug in power level control for a power meter indication of 8 dBm Reconnect power splitter to spectrum analyzer input l Set spectrum analyzer PERSIST control fully clockwise Set sweep oscillator mode switch to automatic sweep and press spectrum analyzer ERASE pushbutton Read greatest positive and negative deviations from center horizontal graticule line Frequency response should not exceed 1 7 dB m Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 10 dB and set REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm Press ERASE pushbutton Read greatest positive and negative deviations from 100 MHz reference step g Frequency response should not exceed 1 7 dB n Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 0 dB REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm and FREQUENCY BAND GHz to 3 8 8 5 Set PERSIST control fully counterclockwise Set sweep oscillator mode switch to manual and set controls to cover entire FREQUENCY BAND selected refer to note in step e Repeat steps k through l Frequency response should not exceed 2 2 dB o Set spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTEN control to 10 dB and set REF LEVEL control to 0 dBm Press ERASE pushbutton Read greatest positive and
272. y in the low frequency bands 01 GHz to 4 1 GHz in ternal mixing In the higher frequency bands 3 8 GHz to 22 GHz internal mixing and 14 5 GHz to 40 GHz external mixing a sweep oscillator is used and the frequencies are accurately tuned using a frequency counter The signal in each case is tuned to the center graticule line of the spectrum analyzer using the TUNING control The tuning accuracy is then indicated by the FREQUENCY readout In the two external mixing bands 14 5 26 6 GHz and 29 9 40 GHz the tuning accuracy is checked at 23 GHz An external mixer is used and the EXTernal MIXER BIAS is adjusted to produce the highest displayed signal level EQUIPMENT Sweep Oscillator RF Plug in HP 8620C 86290A Sweep Oscillator RF HP 8690B 8696A Frequency Counter DDR PA HP 5340A Opt H10 Comb Generators i4 une lee Ree E a Shee ee HP 8406A MIXef L xl cda be DER TRE Ua eq RR er ere au TE HP 11517A Adapter K band to R band Sa Eades ans qux eade PEN wane cS HP 11519A Adapter Waveguide to SMA Narda 4608 Directional Coupler 10 4 HP K752C TO dB Attenuator cse ob a HP 8491B Opt 010 Cable Assembly SMA Plugs HP 8120 1578 Cable Assembly RG 214 U with N Connectors 2 16quied 4 454 ses Ses Soe s
273. z 3 992 GHz 4 008 GHz 5 0 GHz 4 990 GHz 5 010 GHz FREQUENCY SPAN WIDTH AND RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST d 100 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 0 4 div 10 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 1 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 1 MHz RESOLUTION BW 0 4 div 0 4 div 6 0 div 30 kHz RESOLUTION BW 3 9 div 3 MHz to 300 kHz 3 MHz to 1 kHz 1 dB 50 5 dB 2 dB 1 0 dB 00 uuu 0 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST CAL output amplitude 10 3 dBm Reference Level Fine 0 5 dB 1 0 dB 2 4 dB Input Attenuator Step Size Variation Maximum Cumulative Error 0 g0 oO Reference Level Variation 0 5 dB 2 17 2 18 Model 8565A Operation SECTION III OPERATION 3 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 This operating section provides a basic in troduction to signal analysis as well as detailed descriptions of how to use the HP Model 8565A The information is presented in four chapters and five appendixes as follows a Chapter 1 Operating the HP 8565A b Chapter 2 Detailed Control Operation c Chapter 3 Special Topics d Chapter 4 Typical Measurements e Appendix A Operating Precautions f Appendix B Control Glossary g Appendix C Front Panel Adjustment Procedure h Appendix D Theory of Operation i Appendix E Amplitude Conversions 3 3 OPERATOR S MAINTENANCE 3 4 Fuses The 8565A has nine fuses eight of which are internal Only the ac line fuse located at the back of the instrument may be
274. zed spans 100 kHz Div to 20 kHz Div and less the error is less than 15 Resolution bandwidth Accuracy Individual resolution bandwidth 3 dB points lt 15 Switching between bandwidths 3 MHz to 300 kHz 0 5 dB 3 MHz to 1 kHz 1 0 dB 100 kHz BW limited to 90 RH 3 MHz to 100 Hz 1 0 dB for Option 100 2 12 e Model 8565A Installation Incoming Inspection INCOMING INSPECTION TESTS _ _ lt THESE SPAN WIDTH AND RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST ont d DESCRIPTION A comb generator is used to check the span width and the CAL OUTPUT signal is used to check resolution bandwidth accuracy at different positions of the FREQUENCY SPAN DIV and RESOLUTION BW con trols By verifying the calibration of these controls proper operation of the sweep circuits is also verified PROCEDURE a Connect comb generator to 8565A INPUT 50Q b Setcontrols as follows Spectrum Analyzer Set all Normal Settings controls marked in green FREQUENCY BANDGHz fe ce eee eee A 01 1 8 FREQUENCY SPAN DIV 06 cece eect nnn nn 100 MHz INPUT ATTEN cde 04 RSEN E eR LRQ 10 dB id onsite eis www eddie iR tee sar dE US 10 dBm TUNING ons weld cde Wetec Ee Ree ad at as 0 500 GHz Comb Generator Comb freg eliey 5463 eee Re Ore years SI Rees e Sae oy 100 MHz Output amplitude celere hh nnn Optimum c Tune

HP Safety Gate 08565-90014 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents